Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

as long as I am my own master

  • 1 possum

    possum, pŏtŭi, posse, v. n. irreg. (old forms, potis sum, for possum, Plaut. Poen. 5, 2, 26; id. Curc. 5, 3, 23; so,

    potis est,

    id. Ps. 1, 1, 41:

    potis sunt, for possunt,

    id. Poen. 1, 2, 17: POTISIT, S. C. de Bacchan.: potisset, for posset, and potisse, for posse, Lucil. ap. Non. 484, 32, and 445, 29:

    potesse, for posse, very freq.,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 4, 30; id. Cist. 1, 1, 32; id. Truc. 1, 1, 73; id. Ep. 2, 2, 43; id. Bacch. 3, 6, 30 al.; Lucr. 1, 665; 2, 225; 1010:

    possiem,

    Plaut. Bacch. 4, 5, 2; id. Stich. 3, 2, 25:

    potis sis,

    id. Poen. 4, 2, 53:

    potis siem,

    id. Merc. 2, 2, 59: possies, Enn. ap. Gell. 2, 29 fin., or Sat. v. 38 Vahl.; Plaut. As. 4, 2, 10; id. Aul. 4, 10, 17; id. Most. 2, 2, 34; 3, 2, 147; id. Men. 5, 9, 45:

    possiet,

    id. Cist. 1, 3, 37; id. Bacch. 3, 1, 3; id. Most. 1, 1, 13 al.; cf. Brix ad Plaut. Mil. 884; Fleck. Krit. Misc. p. 45 sq.—In pass.: potestur, Enn. ap. Diom. p. 380 P. (Ann. [p. 1404] v. 594 Vahl.): Pac. ap. Non. 508, 29; Quadrig. ap. id. 508, 30; Lucr. 3, 1010: poteratur, Cael. ap. Non. 508, 27: possitur, Lex. Servil. p. 59 Haubold; Scaurus ap. Diom. p. 381 P.: possetur, Quadrig. ap. Non. 508, 18) [potis-sum].
    I.
    In gen., to be able, have power; I ( thou, he, etc.) can (syn. queo):

    quantum valeam, quantumque possim,

    Cic. Fam. 6, 5, 1:

    consilio, quantum potero, labore plus paene quam potero exeubabo,

    id. Phil. 6, 7, 18:

    ut, quoad possem et liceret, a senis latere nunquam discederem,

    id. Lael. 1, 1:

    timor igitur ab iis aegritudinem potuit repellere, ratio non poterit?

    id. Tuse. 3, 27, 66.—With sup.:

    Caesari te commendavi et tradidi, ut gravissime diligentissimeque potui,

    as earnestly and warmly as I possibly could, Cic. Fam. 7, 17, 2: potest fieri, it may be, is possible:

    potest fieri, ut fallar,

    id. ib. 13, 73, 2: non possum quin, I can not but: non possum quin exclamem, ut ait ille in Trinummo (Plaut. Trin. 3, 2, 79; cf. id. Mil. 2, 2, 107); Cic. de Or. 2, 10, 39:

    ut nihil ad te dem litterarum, facere non possum,

    I cannot help writing to you, id. Att. 8, 14, 1:

    facere non potui quin tibi sententiam declararem meam,

    id. Fam. 6, 13, 1; cf.:

    non possum non: aequitatem tuam non potui non probare,

    id. ib. 1, 9, 26:

    non possum te non accusare,

    id. ib. 5, 14, 2:

    is non potest eam (mortem) non timere,

    id. Fin. 3, 8, 29.— Absol.: potest (sc. fieri), it may be, is possible:

    potest, ut alii ita arbitrentur,

    Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 38: non, non sic futurum est;

    non potest,

    Ter. Phorm. 2, 1, 73; Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 100 Brix; cf. id. Trin. 3, 3, 3:

    quae (mala) si potest singula consolando levare, etc.,

    Cic. Fin. 5, 28, 84:

    nos dignitatem, ut potest, retinebimus,

    id. Fam. 1, 2, 4.—Quantum or ut potest, as much or as far as possible:

    ibo atque arcessam medicum, quantum potest,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 2; id. Most. 3, 2, 71; Ter. Eun. 5, 1, 20:

    nos in senatu dignitatem nostram, ut potest in tantā hominum perfidiā, retinebimus,

    Cic. Fam. 1, 2, 4.—In urgent questions:

    possum scire, quo profectus, cujus sis, aut quid veneris?

    may I know? can I learn? pray, will you tell me? Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 190:

    possumne ego hodie ex te exsculpere Verum?

    Ter. Eun. 4, 4, 44.—
    II.
    In partic.
    A. 1.
    With neutr. acc. used adverbially (class.; cf.

    polleo): vocat me, quae in me plus potest,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 2, 42:

    plus potest qui plus valet,

    id. ib. 4, 3, 38:

    qui tum et poterant per vim et scelus plurimum, et quod poterant, id audebant,

    Cic. Quint. 21, 69:

    quid ergo? hoc pueri possunt, viri non poterunt?

    id. Tusc. 2, 14, 34:

    qui apud me et amicitiā, et beneficiis, et dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Rosc. Am. 1, 4:

    plus aliquanto apud te pecuniae cupiditas, quam judicii metus potuit,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 57, § 131; id. de Or. 2, 42, 180:

    quid aristolochia ad morsus serpentum possit,

    id. Div. 1, 10, 16:

    quoniam multum potest provisio animi ad minuendum dolorem,

    id. Tusc. 3, 14, 30:

    ad beate vivendum satis posse virtutem,

    id. ib. 5, 5, 12: multum posse ad salutem alterius... parum potuisse ad exitium, Cic. Opp. ap. Amm. 30, 8, 7.—
    2.
    In gen., and without neutr. acc. (late Lat.):

    posse litteras ejus ad perniciem, non posse ad salutem,

    App. Mag. 79, p. 324.—
    B.
    Posse aliquem, to be able to embrace one ( poet.), Mart. 3, 32.—
    C.
    Posse as subst. ( poet.):

    posse loqui,

    the power of speech, Ov. M. 2, 483:

    posse moveri = facultatem se movendi,

    id. ib. 11, 177.—
    D.
    Freq. in elliptical sentences:

    quod vi non poterant, fraude assequi temptant,

    Curt. 5, 10, 8:

    Ismenias, etsi publicis non poterat, privatis tamen viribus adjuvabat,

    Just. 5, 9, 8:

    ut auxilium quod misericordiā non poterat, jure cognationis obtineret,

    id. 28, 1, 9:

    ut collegam vi, si aliter non possent, de foro abducerent,

    Liv. 2, 56.—
    E.
    In apodosis of conditional sentences, analogous to the auxiliaries of the Engl. potential mood (v. Roby, § 1520; Zumpt, § 519).
    1.
    Indic.:

    ille potuit exspectatior venire, qui te nuntiaret mortuom (= si quis nuntiaret, etc.),

    Plaut. Most. 1, 2, 12:

    nec vero ipsam amicitiam tueri possumus, nisi aeque amicos et nosmet ipsos diligamus,

    Cic. Fin. 1, 20, 67:

    Pompeius munitiones Caesaris prohibere non poterat, nisi praelio decertare vellet,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 44: consul esse qui potui, nisi eum vitae cursum tenuissem, Cic. Rep. 1, 6, 10:

    (res publica) poterat esse perpetua, si patriis viveretur institutis,

    id. ib. 3, 29, 41:

    deleri totus exercitus potuit, si fugientis persecuti victores essent,

    Liv. 32, 12, 6:

    nisi felicitas in socordiam vertisset exuere jugum potuerunt,

    Tac. Agr. 31.—
    2.
    Subj.:

    qui denique ex bestiis fructus, nisi homines adjuvarent, percipi posset,

    Cic. Off. 2, 4, 14; cf.:

    ventum quidem erat eo, ut, si hostem similem antiquis Macedonum regibus habuisset consul, magna clades accipi potuerit,

    Liv. 44, 4, 9.—So when the condition is implied, or is contained in an adverbial clause:

    quae res egestati et aeri alieno tuo praeter mortem Caesaris subvenire potuisset?

    Cic. Phil. 2, 14, 36:

    quis opifex praeter naturam... tantam sollertiam persequi potuisset in sensibus?

    id. N. D. 2, 57, 142; id. Tusc. 4, 19, 44:

    plurima proferre possemus, sed modus adhibendus est,

    Nep. Epam. 4, 6:

    possem hic Ciceronis respondere verbis, sed, etc.,

    Quint. 2, 21, 14.—Hence, pŏtens, entis ( gen. plur. potentum, Verg. A. 12, 519; Claud. Laud. Stil. 2, 114), P. a.
    A.
    In gen., able, mighty, powerful, potent (class.):

    amplae atque potentes civitates,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 56, 169:

    familiae clarae ac potentes,

    Liv. 23, 4:

    amici magni et potentes,

    Suet. Aug. 56:

    ne quis ex plebe contra potentiorem auxilii egeret,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 10:

    duo potentissimi reges,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2, 4:

    potentissimus et clarissimus civis,

    id. Planc. 21, 51.—
    (β).
    With gen.:

    quanta sit humani ingenii vis, quam potens efficiendi quae velit,

    Quint. 12, 11, 10.—
    (γ).
    With abl.:

    Roma potens opibus,

    Ov. F. 4, 255:

    pecuniā et orbitate,

    Tac. H. 1, 73.—
    (δ).
    With inf.:

    compensare potens,

    Dig. 16, 2, 10.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    Having power over, ruling over, master of a thing; with gen.:

    dum liber, dum mei potens sum,

    as long as I am my own master, Liv. 26, 13, 14:

    sanus mentisque potens,

    in his right mind, Ov. Tr. 2, 139:

    potens mei non eram,

    Curt. 4, 13, 23:

    potentes rerum suarum atque urbis,

    having made themselves masters of, Liv. 23, 16, 6; so, facere aliquem potentem alicujus rei, to make one master of any thing, to give one the power over a thing:

    consilii,

    id. 8, 13, 14:

    imperii,

    id. 22, 42, 12: diva potens Cypri, that reigns over Cyprus, i.e. Venus, Hor. C. 1, 3, 1:

    Naïadum potens (Bacchus),

    id. ib. 3, 25, 14:

    silvarum potens Diana,

    id. C. S. 1:

    diva potens uteri,

    i.e. Lucina, Ov. M. 9, 315:

    rerum omnium potens Juppiter,

    Tac. H. 4, 84:

    lyrae Musa potens,

    that presides over lyric poetry, Hor. C. 1, 6, 10:

    irae,

    master of his anger, Curt. 4, 2, 5:

    mariti,

    ruling her husband, Tac. A. 14, 60:

    animal potens leti,

    that can kill, deadly, Luc. 6, 485; cf. id. 5, 199 Corte ad loc.—
    2.
    Fit for, capable of any thing; with gen.:

    potens regni,

    Liv. 24, 2: hostes neque pugnae, neque fugae satis potentes caeduntur, unable either to fight or flee, id. 8, 39.—
    3.
    Partaking of, having attained a thing; with gen. ( poet.):

    pacis potentes,

    Plaut. Poen. 5, 4, 9:

    voti,

    Ov. M. 8, 80:

    jussi,

    having fulfilled the command, id. ib. 4, 509.—
    4.
    Strong, mighty, powerful, efficacious, potent (mostly poet. and in post-Aug. prose):

    fortuna in res bellicas potens,

    Liv. 9, 17:

    herba potens ad opem,

    Ov. H. 5, 147:

    verba,

    id. Am. 3, 11, 31:

    herba potens adversus ranas,

    Plin. 25, 10, 81, § 130:

    passum ex uvis contra haemorrhoida potens,

    id. 23, 1, 12, § 15.— Comp.:

    nihil esse potentius auro,

    Ov. Am. 3, 8, 29:

    quaedam ad efficiendum potentiora,

    Quint. 6, 1, 26.— Sup.:

    potentissimae cantharides,

    Plin. 29, 4, 30, § 94:

    argumenta,

    Quint. 6, 4, 22.—Hence, adv.: pŏtenter, strongly, mightily, powerfully, effectually ( poet. and in post-Aug. prose):

    se ipsam potenter atque efficaciter defendere,

    Val. Max. 1, 1, 1:

    dicere,

    Quint. 12, 10, 72. — Comp.:

    aurum... perrumpere amat saxa potentius Ictu fulmineo,

    Hor. C. 3, 16, 9; Quint. 6, 4, 18.—
    B.
    According to one's ability or powers ( poet.):

    lecta potenter res,

    Hor. A. P. 40.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > possum

  • 2 сам большой

    сам большой < сам маленький>
    прост.

    - А у меня отец умер недавно. Теперь я - сам большой! (М. Горький, Злодеи) — 'And my father died not long ago. Now I am my own master.'

    Русско-английский фразеологический словарь > сам большой

  • 3 רב II

    רַבII m. (preced.) 1) superior, master. Gitt.23b העבד … רַבּוֹ של חבירו אבל לא מיד רַבּוֹ שלו a slave may receive a deed of manumission in behalf of a fellow slave at the hand of his fellows master, but not at the hands of his own master (if both slaves belong to the same master). Ab. I, 3, v. עֶבֶד. Ḥag.5a, v. מָצָא; a. fr. 2) teacher. Ber.63b יאמרו הרב בכעסוכ׳ they will say, the teacher (the Lord) is angry, and the disciple (Moses) is angry, what is to become of Israel? Ib. כל תלמיד … רבווכ׳ a student with whom his teacher is angry for the first time, and who keeps silence. Eduy. I, 3, v. לָשוֹן. Ab. I, 16 עשה לך רבוכ׳ get thyself a teacher, and be relieved of doubt. R. Hash. II, 9 רַבִּי ותלמידי רביוכ׳ my teacher and my pupil; my teacher in wisdom ; v. רַבִּי.M. Kat. 9a>, a. fr. למדתנו רַבֵּינוּ thou, our teacher, hast taught us; v. רַבֵּנוּ; a. v. fr.Esp. רַב Rab, a) title of the Babylonian Amoraim. Pes.52b; a. v. fr. בי רב the school of, v. בֵּי.b) surname of Abba Arekha, the founder of the academy of Sura in Babylonia (v. Graetz, Gesch. d. Jud.1> IV, p. 312, sq.; Fr. Mbo, p. 122b>). Ḥull.95b כולהו שני דרבוכ׳ as long as Rab lived, R. Joḥ. addressed his letters to Babylonia, ‘to our teacher in Babylonia. Ab. Zar.10b אדרכן שמשיה לרב A. (a Parthian ruler) attended (associated with) Rab. Y.Peah VI, 19c רב כד נחת לתמן when Rab came down to Babylonia. Erub.50b, a. fr. רב תנא הוא ופליג Rab is a Tannai and has a right to differ (with other Tannaim). Nidd.24b, a. fr. הלכתא כרבוכ׳, v. אִיסּוּרָא; a. v. fr. ספרא דבי רב, ספרי דבי רב, v. סִפְרָא.Pl. רַבּוֹת (only with suffix). Taan.7a, a. e. מרַבּוֹתַי v. לָמַד. Shebu.47a רַבּוֹתֵינוּ שבבבלוכ׳ ‘our teachers in Babylonia means Rab and Samuel. Y.Gitt.VII, 48d top ורבותינו אמרו and our teachers said; מנו רבותיניוכ׳ who are meant by ‘our teachers? Ib., a. e. בשלשה … רביתיני on three occasions R. Judah (with his court) is quoted as ‘our teachers. Y.Sabb.V, end, 7c רבותינו שבגולה our teachers in the diaspora (Babylonia, v. supra); Y.Bets. II, 61c bot. Y.Meg.I, 70d כתבו אגרת ושלחו לרבותינו שהןוכ׳ they (Mordecai and Esther) wrote a letter addressed ‘to our teachers (in Palestine) that be, saying to them ; a. fr.Fem. רַבָּה mistress. Ruth R. to II, 5 רַבָּתָהּוכ׳ her mistress (Naomi), v. רָפָה.

    Jewish literature > רב II

  • 4 רַב

    רַבII m. (preced.) 1) superior, master. Gitt.23b העבד … רַבּוֹ של חבירו אבל לא מיד רַבּוֹ שלו a slave may receive a deed of manumission in behalf of a fellow slave at the hand of his fellows master, but not at the hands of his own master (if both slaves belong to the same master). Ab. I, 3, v. עֶבֶד. Ḥag.5a, v. מָצָא; a. fr. 2) teacher. Ber.63b יאמרו הרב בכעסוכ׳ they will say, the teacher (the Lord) is angry, and the disciple (Moses) is angry, what is to become of Israel? Ib. כל תלמיד … רבווכ׳ a student with whom his teacher is angry for the first time, and who keeps silence. Eduy. I, 3, v. לָשוֹן. Ab. I, 16 עשה לך רבוכ׳ get thyself a teacher, and be relieved of doubt. R. Hash. II, 9 רַבִּי ותלמידי רביוכ׳ my teacher and my pupil; my teacher in wisdom ; v. רַבִּי.M. Kat. 9a>, a. fr. למדתנו רַבֵּינוּ thou, our teacher, hast taught us; v. רַבֵּנוּ; a. v. fr.Esp. רַב Rab, a) title of the Babylonian Amoraim. Pes.52b; a. v. fr. בי רב the school of, v. בֵּי.b) surname of Abba Arekha, the founder of the academy of Sura in Babylonia (v. Graetz, Gesch. d. Jud.1> IV, p. 312, sq.; Fr. Mbo, p. 122b>). Ḥull.95b כולהו שני דרבוכ׳ as long as Rab lived, R. Joḥ. addressed his letters to Babylonia, ‘to our teacher in Babylonia. Ab. Zar.10b אדרכן שמשיה לרב A. (a Parthian ruler) attended (associated with) Rab. Y.Peah VI, 19c רב כד נחת לתמן when Rab came down to Babylonia. Erub.50b, a. fr. רב תנא הוא ופליג Rab is a Tannai and has a right to differ (with other Tannaim). Nidd.24b, a. fr. הלכתא כרבוכ׳, v. אִיסּוּרָא; a. v. fr. ספרא דבי רב, ספרי דבי רב, v. סִפְרָא.Pl. רַבּוֹת (only with suffix). Taan.7a, a. e. מרַבּוֹתַי v. לָמַד. Shebu.47a רַבּוֹתֵינוּ שבבבלוכ׳ ‘our teachers in Babylonia means Rab and Samuel. Y.Gitt.VII, 48d top ורבותינו אמרו and our teachers said; מנו רבותיניוכ׳ who are meant by ‘our teachers? Ib., a. e. בשלשה … רביתיני on three occasions R. Judah (with his court) is quoted as ‘our teachers. Y.Sabb.V, end, 7c רבותינו שבגולה our teachers in the diaspora (Babylonia, v. supra); Y.Bets. II, 61c bot. Y.Meg.I, 70d כתבו אגרת ושלחו לרבותינו שהןוכ׳ they (Mordecai and Esther) wrote a letter addressed ‘to our teachers (in Palestine) that be, saying to them ; a. fr.Fem. רַבָּה mistress. Ruth R. to II, 5 רַבָּתָהּוכ׳ her mistress (Naomi), v. רָפָה.

    Jewish literature > רַב

  • 5 Riley, James

    SUBJECT AREA: Metallurgy
    [br]
    b. 1840 Halifax, England
    d. 15 July 1910 Harrogate, England
    [br]
    English steelmaker who promoted the manufacture of low-carbon bulk steel by the open-hearth process for tin plate and shipbuilding; pioneer of nickel steels.
    [br]
    After working as a millwright in Halifax, Riley found employment at the Ormesby Ironworks in Middlesbrough until, in 1869, he became manager of the Askam Ironworks in Cumberland. Three years later, in 1872, he was appointed Blast-furnace Manager at the pioneering Siemens Steel Company's works at Landore, near Swansea in South Wales. Using Spanish ore, he produced the manganese-rich iron (spiegeleisen) required as an additive to make satisfactory steel. Riley was promoted in 1874 to be General Manager at Landore, and he worked with William Siemens to develop the use of the latter's regenerative furnace for the production of open-hearth steel. He persuaded Welsh makers of tin plate to use sheets rolled from lowcarbon (mild) steel instead of from charcoal iron and, partly by publishing some test results, he was instrumental in influencing the Admiralty to build two naval vessels of mild steel, the Mercury and the Iris.
    In 1878 Riley moved north on his appointment as General Manager of the Steel Company of Scotland, a firm closely associated with Charles Tennant that was formed in 1872 to make steel by the Siemens process. Already by 1878, fourteen Siemens melting furnaces had been erected, and in that year 42,000 long tons of ingots were produced at the company's Hallside (Newton) Works, situated 8 km (5 miles) south-east of Glasgow. Under Riley's leadership, steelmaking in open-hearth furnaces was initiated at a second plant situated at Blochairn. Plates and sections for all aspects of shipbuilding, including boilers, formed the main products; the company also supplied the greater part of the steel for the Forth (Railway) Bridge. Riley was associated with technical modifications which improved the performance of steelmaking furnaces using Siemens's principles. He built a gasfired cupola for melting pig-iron, and constructed the first British "universal" plate mill using three-high rolls (Lauth mill).
    At the request of French interests, Riley investigated the properties of steels containing various proportions of nickel; the report that he read before the Iron and Steel Institute in 1889 successfully brought to the notice of potential users the greatly enhanced strength that nickel could impart and its ability to yield alloys possessing substantially lower corrodibility.
    The Steel Company of Scotland paid dividends in the years to 1890, but then came a lean period. In 1895, at the age of 54, Riley moved once more to another employer, becoming General Manager of the Glasgow Iron and Steel Company, which had just laid out a new steelmaking plant at Wishaw, 25 km (15 miles) south-east of Glasgow, where it already had blast furnaces. Still the technical innovator, in 1900 Riley presented an account of his experiences in introducing molten blast-furnace metal as feed for the open-hearth steel furnaces. In the early 1890s it was largely through Riley's efforts that a West of Scotland Board of Conciliation and Arbitration for the Manufactured Steel Trade came into being; he was its first Chairman and then its President.
    In 1899 James Riley resigned from his Scottish employment to move back to his native Yorkshire, where he became his own master by acquiring the small Richmond Ironworks situated at Stockton-on-Tees. Although Riley's 1900 account to the Iron and Steel Institute was the last of the many of which he was author, he continued to contribute to the discussion of papers written by others.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    President, West of Scotland Iron and Steel Institute 1893–5. Vice-President, Iron and Steel Institute, 1893–1910. Iron and Steel Institute (London) Bessemer Gold Medal 1887.
    Bibliography
    1876, "On steel for shipbuilding as supplied to the Royal Navy", Transactions of the Institute of Naval Architects 17:135–55.
    1884, "On recent improvements in the method of manufacture of open-hearth steel", Journal of the Iron and Steel Institute 2:43–52 plus plates 27–31.
    1887, "Some investigations as to the effects of different methods of treatment of mild steel in the manufacture of plates", Journal of the Iron and Steel Institute 1:121–30 (plus sheets II and III and plates XI and XII).
    27 February 1888, "Improvements in basichearth steel making furnaces", British patent no. 2,896.
    27 February 1888, "Improvements in regenerative furnaces for steel-making and analogous operations", British patent no. 2,899.
    1889, "Alloys of nickel and steel", Journal of the Iron and Steel Institute 1:45–55.
    Further Reading
    A.Slaven, 1986, "James Riley", in Dictionary of Scottish Business Biography 1860–1960, Volume 1: The Staple Industries (ed. A.Slaven and S. Checkland), Aberdeen: Aberdeen University Press, 136–8.
    "Men you know", The Bailie (Glasgow) 23 January 1884, series no. 588 (a brief biography, with portrait).
    J.C.Carr and W.Taplin, 1962, History of the British Steel Industry, Harvard University Press (contains an excellent summary of salient events).
    JKA

    Biographical history of technology > Riley, James

  • 6 grande

    adj.
    1 big, large.
    un gran artista a great artist
    el gran favorito the firm favorite
    una gran figura a big name
    una gran parte de mi trabajo implica… a large part of my job involves…
    una gran responsabilidad a heavy responsibility
    a lo grande in a big way, in style
    grandes almacenes department store
    Gran Bretaña Great Britain
    el Gran Cañón the Grand Canyon
    gran danés great Dane
    gran éxito smash (hit) (disco, libro)
    los Grandes Lagos the Great Lakes
    la Gran Muralla (China) the Great Wall (of China)
    el gran público the general public
    2 old (de edad). (Mexican Spanish, River Plate)
    3 fantastic(informal). ( River Plate)
    4 magnus, Mag, magnum.
    5 grand, formidable, majestical, stately.
    m.
    grandee (noble).
    * * *
    1 (tamaño) large, big
    2 (fuerte, intenso) great
    3 (mayor) grown-up, old, big
    \
    a lo grande on a grand scale, in a big way
    estar grande una cosa a alguien to be too big on somebody
    pasarlo en grande familiar to have a great time
    vivir a lo grande figurado to live in style
    Grande de España grandee Table 1 NOTA See also gran/Table 1
    * * *
    adj.
    1) big
    * * *
    1. ADJ
    ( antes de sm sing gran)
    1) [de tamaño] big, large; [de estatura] big, tall; [número, velocidad] high, great

    ¿cómo es de grande? — how big o large is it?, what size is it?

    en cantidades más grandes — in larger o greater quantities

    grandísimo — enormous, huge

    un esfuerzo grandísimo — an enormous effort, a huge effort

    ¡grandísimo tunante! — you old rogue!

    hacer algo a lo grande — to do sth in style, make a splash doing sth *

    2) (=importante) [artista, hazaña] great; [empresa] big
    3) (=mucho, muy) great

    se estrenó con gran éxito — it was a great success, it went off very well

    4) [en edad]
    (=mayor)

    ya eres grande, Raúl — you are a big boy now, Raúl

    ¿qué piensas hacer cuando seas grande? — what do you want to do when you grow up?

    5)

    ¡qué grande! — Arg * how funny!

    2. SMF
    1) (=personaje importante)
    2) LAm (=adulto) adult
    3. SF
    1) Arg [de lotería] first prize, big prize
    2) And ** (=cárcel) clink **, jail
    * * *
    I
    adjetivo [ gran is used before singular nouns]
    1)
    a) ( en dimensiones) large, big; <boca/nariz> big
    b) ( en demasía) too big

    me queda or me está grande — it's too big for me

    quedarle grande a alguien — puesto/responsabilidad to be too much for somebody

    2) ( alto) tall
    3) (Geog)
    4) ( en edad)

    los más grandes pueden ir solos — the older o bigger ones can go on their own

    a) (notable, excelente) great

    un gran hombre/vino — a great man/wine

    b) ( poderoso) big
    6)
    a) (en intensidad, grado) great

    me llevé un susto más grande...! — I got such a fright!

    una temporada de gran éxito — a very o a highly successful season

    7)
    a) ( en número) < familia> large, big; < clase> big

    la gran parte or mayoría de los votantes — the great o vast majority of the voters

    b) ( elevado)

    a gran velocidad — at high o great speed

    en grande: lo pasamos en grande — we had a great time (colloq)

    •
    II
    masculino, femenino
    1) (de la industria, el comercio) big o leading name
    2)
    a) ( mayor)

    quiero ir con los grandes — I want to go with the big boys/girls

    b) ( adulto)
    •
    * * *
    = vast [vaster -comp., vastest -sup.], big [bigger -comp., biggest -sup.], bulky, considerable, deep [deeper -comp., deepest -sup.], extensive, great [greater -comp., greatest -sup.], heavy [heavier -comp., heaviest -sup.], high [higher -comp., highest -sup.], huge, large [larger -comp., largest -sup.], large scale [large-scale], tremendous, wide [wider -comp., widest -sup.], goodly [goodlier -comp., goodliest -sup.], abysmal, heavyweight [heavy weight], broad [broader -comp., broadest -sup.], of the highest order.
    Ex. If you add to this other access points, such as collections housed in old people's homes or day centres, prisons, hospitals, youth clubs, playgroups etc the coverage is vast.
    Ex. Fiction is a big item for children and also just for ordinary public library users.
    Ex. Like all enumerative schedules, the LC schedules are bulky, extending to some 8000 pages.
    Ex. The need to become familiar with different command languages for different hosts is a considerable barrier to effective retrieval.
    Ex. The world's largest processing department's plans and policies are always of deep interest.
    Ex. The minutely detailed classification is of the type appropriate to an extensive collection.
    Ex. Clearly, great variations can be expected between different indexing languages for different databases.
    Ex. In fact, the area was well served by a very good neighbourhood advice centre which had a heavy workload of advice and information-giving.
    Ex. Lower specificity will be associated with lower precision but high recall.
    Ex. A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex. Serial searching for a string of characters is usually performed on a small subset of a large file.
    Ex. It is in the development of such large-scale services that problems are seen most acutely.
    Ex. There has been tremendous growth in libraries since then, but, fundamentally, it has been possible to build on the foundation that nineteenth-century heroes constructed.
    Ex. The method is sufficiently flexible to allow for wide modifications.
    Ex. However, we must not forget the book which the critics acclaim and which also sells in goodly numbers.
    Ex. The major problem encountered in encouraging young adults to use public libraries is the abysmal lack of specialist young adult librarians = El principal problema que se encuentra para es incentivar a los jóvenes a usar las bibliotecas públicas es la enorme falta de bibliotecarios especialistas en temas relacionados con los adolescentes.
    Ex. Heavyweight information technology firms such as IBM are appearing in the market and challenging traditional players.
    Ex. In 'upper town' streets are broad, quiet, and tree-shaded; the homes are tall and heavy and look like battleships, each anchored in its private sea of grass.
    Ex. I've got to tell you, and I do say this affectionately, but we're talking about a geek of the highest order.
    ----
    * a grandes rasgos = broadly, rough draft.
    * a gran escala = large scale [large-scale], massive, on a wide scale, high-volume, wide-scale, on a broad scale, in a big way, on a grand scale.
    * a gran velocidad = at great speed.
    * a lo grande = in a big way, big time, grandly, on a grand scale.
    * armar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * a un gran coste = at (a) great expense.
    * avanzar con gran dificultad = grind on.
    * bastante grande = largish.
    * calabacín grande = marrow, marrow squash.
    * causar una gran sensación = make + a splash.
    * causar un gran alboroto = make + a splash.
    * causar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons, make + a splash.
    * celebrar a lo grande = make + a song and dance about.
    * con gran capacidad = capacious.
    * con gran colorido = brightly coloured.
    * con gran densidad de población = densely populated.
    * con gran dificultad = with great difficulty.
    * con gran esplendor = grandly.
    * con gran iluminación = brightly illuminated.
    * con gran motivación = highly-motivated.
    * con gran sentimiento = earnestly.
    * conseguir en gran medida + Infinitivo = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * contribuir en gran medida a + Infinitivo = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio, go far in + Gerundio, go far towards + Gerundio.
    * con una gran cultura = well-read.
    * con una gran diferencia = by a huge margin.
    * con una gran tradición = long-standing.
    * con un gran número de lectores = widely-read.
    * con un gran suspiro = with a deep sigh.
    * convertirse en un gran problema = grow to + a crisis.
    * correr un gran riesgo = play (for) + high stakes.
    * crear con gran destreza = craft.
    * dar un gran paso adelante = reach + milestone.
    * de gran ahorro energético = energy-saving.
    * de gran belleza = scenic.
    * de gran calibre = high-calibre.
    * de gran calidad = high-quality, high-grade [high grade], high-calibre.
    * de gran capacidad = large-capacity, high capacity.
    * de gran colorido = brightly coloured.
    * de gran corazón = big-hearted.
    * de gran efecto = wide-reaching.
    * de gran éxito comercial = high selling.
    * de gran formato = oversized.
    * de gran impacto = high impact [high-impact].
    * de gran influencia = seminal.
    * de gran lucidez = clear-sighted.
    * de gran lujo = top-class.
    * de gran potencia = high-powered.
    * de gran repercusión = far-reaching, wide-reaching, far-ranging.
    * de gran talento = talented.
    * de gran valor = highly valued, highly valuable.
    * de gran valor histórico = of great historical value.
    * de gran venta = high selling.
    * demasiado grande = oversized.
    * describir a grandes rasgos = paint + a broad picture.
    * desplazarse grandes distancias = travel + long distances.
    * ejercer una gran influencia en = play + a strong hand in.
    * el gran hermano = big brother.
    * el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.
    * empresa de grandes derroches = high roller.
    * en gran cantidad = prodigiously.
    * en grandes cantidades = en masse, in good number, in bulk.
    * en grandes números = in record numbers, in record numbers.
    * en gran formato = oversize, oversized.
    * en gran medida = by and large, extensively, greatly, heavily, largely, to a considerable extent, to a high degree, to a large extent, tremendously, vastly, very much, to a great extent, in no small way, to any great degree, in many ways, in large part, in large measure, in no small measure, to a large degree, to a great degree.
    * en gran número = numerously.
    * en gran parte = largely, in large part, in large measure, for the most part, to a great extent, to a great degree.
    * en un gran aprieto = in dire straits.
    * en un gran apuro = in dire straits.
    * esperar una (gran) sorpresa = be in for a (big) surprise.
    * expresión típica de Gran Bretaña = Briticism.
    * extra grande = extra-large.
    * gestión de grandes extensiones para la cría de ganado = range management.
    * gran altura = high altitude.
    * gran aumento = heavy increase.
    * gran bebedor = heavy drinker.
    * gran belleza = scenic beauty.
    * Gran Bretaña = Britain, Great Britain.
    * gran calidad = high standard.
    * gran cantidad de = large crop of, mass of.
    * gran categoría = high standard.
    * gran cosa = big deal.
    * gran danés = Great Dane.
    * Gran Depresión, la = Depression, the, Great Depression, the.
    * grandes almacenes = department store.
    * grandes cantidades de = storerooms of, huge numbers of, huge numbers of, great numbers of.
    * grandes escritores, los = great imaginative writers, the.
    * grandes robles nacen de pequeñas bellotas = great oaks from little acorns grow.
    * grandes sumas de dinero = vast sums of money.
    * grande superficie = shopping mall, shopping complex, shopping centre.
    * grandes y pequeños = great and small.
    * grande y tenebroso = cavernous.
    * gran ducado = grand-duchy.
    * gran espectáculo = extravaganza.
    * gran extensión de tierra dedicada a la cría de animales de pasto = rangeland.
    * gran grupo = constellation.
    * gran mentira = big fat lie.
    * gran nivel = high standard.
    * gran número de = great numbers of.
    * gran pantalla de televisión = large-screen television.
    * gran parte = much.
    * gran parte de = much of.
    * gran peso = heavy weight.
    * gran placer = great pleasure.
    * gran potencia = great power.
    * gran salto adelante = giant leap, great leap forward.
    * gran tiburón blanco = great white shark.
    * gran titular = headline banner.
    * hacer grandes esfuerzos por = take + (great) pains to.
    * hacer grandes progresos = make + great strides.
    * hacer un gran esfuerzo = go out of + Posesivo + way to + Infinitivo.
    * hacer un gran negocio = make + a killing.
    * IGE (Integración a Gran Escala) = LSI (Large Scale Integration).
    * influir en gran medida = become + a force.
    * jaula grande para pájaros = aviary.
    * jugador de grandes apuestas = high roller.
    * la Gran Manzana = the Big Apple.
    * la gran mayoría de = the vast majority of, the bulk of.
    * levantar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * llevarse una (gran) sorpresa = be in for a (big) surprise.
    * lo suficientemente grande = large enough, big enough.
    * más grande = greater.
    * muy grande = big time.
    * Nombre + a gran escala = broad scale + Nombre.
    * no ser gran cosa = not add up to much, add up to + nothing.
    * no ser una gran pérdida = be no great loss.
    * no significar gran cosa = not add up to much.
    * no suponer gran cosa = not add up to much.
    * no valer gran cosa = be no great shakes.
    * pago único y bien grande = fat lump sum.
    * para + Posesivo + gran sorpresa = much to + Posesivo + surprise.
    * pasarlo a lo grande = have + a ball, have + a whale of a time.
    * pasarlo en grande = have + a ball, have + a whale of a time.
    * pasárselo en grande = enjoy + every minute of, love + every minute of it.
    * Pedro el Grande = Peter the Great.
    * pensar a lo grande = think + big.
    * Pie Grande = Bigfoot, Sasquatch.
    * por un gran margen = by a huge margin.
    * producir con gran destreza = craft.
    * provocar un gran alboroto = make + a splash.
    * provocar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * que le presta gran importancia a la cultura = culture-conscious.
    * recorrer grandes distancias = travel + long distances.
    * revista que tiene una gran demanda popular = mass-market journal.
    * ser de gran ayuda para = be a boon to.
    * ser de gran beneficio para = be of great benefit to.
    * ser una gran ayuda = be a tower of strength.
    * ser un gran alivio = be a welcome relief.
    * ser un gran apoyo = be a tower of strength.
    * ser un gran avance = be half the battle.
    * ser un gran paso adelante = be half the battle.
    * taza grande = mug.
    * tener en gran estima = have + a very high regard for.
    * tener gran éxito = hit + a home run, hit it out of + the park, knock it out of + the park.
    * tener gran importancia = be of high significance.
    * tener gran repercusión = be far reaching.
    * tener una gran tradición = have + a long ancestry.
    * tener un gran impacto = have + a big impact.
    * tomar un gran riesgo = play (for) + high stakes.
    * una gran cantidad de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a large degree of, a mass of, a plethora of, a supply of, a vast amount of, a city of, a wealth of, a sea of, a cascade of, an army of, a good many, a huge number of, a great number of, a multitude of, scores of, a host of, a vast corpus of, a whole host of.
    * una gran cantidad y variedad de = a wealth and breadth of.
    * una gran diversidad de = a wide range of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of.
    * una gran experiencia = a wealth of experience.
    * una gran extensión de = a sea of.
    * una gran gama de = a wide range of, a rich tapestry of, a wide band of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * una gran mayoría de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran parte de = a broad population of, a lion's share of.
    * una gran pérdida = a great loss.
    * una gran proporción de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran variedad de = a wide range of, a multiplicity of, a rich tapestry of, a plurality of, a broad variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * un gran espectro de = a wide band of.
    * un gran número de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a plethora of, a wide range of, a full roster of, a fair number of, a great number of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a vast corpus of.
    * un gran repertorio de = an arsenal of, an armoury of [armory].
    * un gran volumen de = a vast corpus of.
    * venirle Algo grande a Alguien = get + too big for + Posesivo + breeches.
    * WAN (red de gran alcance) = WAN (wide area network).
    * * *
    I
    adjetivo [ gran is used before singular nouns]
    1)
    a) ( en dimensiones) large, big; <boca/nariz> big
    b) ( en demasía) too big

    me queda or me está grande — it's too big for me

    quedarle grande a alguien — puesto/responsabilidad to be too much for somebody

    2) ( alto) tall
    3) (Geog)
    4) ( en edad)

    los más grandes pueden ir solos — the older o bigger ones can go on their own

    a) (notable, excelente) great

    un gran hombre/vino — a great man/wine

    b) ( poderoso) big
    6)
    a) (en intensidad, grado) great

    me llevé un susto más grande...! — I got such a fright!

    una temporada de gran éxito — a very o a highly successful season

    7)
    a) ( en número) < familia> large, big; < clase> big

    la gran parte or mayoría de los votantes — the great o vast majority of the voters

    b) ( elevado)

    a gran velocidad — at high o great speed

    en grande: lo pasamos en grande — we had a great time (colloq)

    •
    II
    masculino, femenino
    1) (de la industria, el comercio) big o leading name
    2)
    a) ( mayor)

    quiero ir con los grandes — I want to go with the big boys/girls

    b) ( adulto)
    •
    * * *
    = vast [vaster -comp., vastest -sup.], big [bigger -comp., biggest -sup.], bulky, considerable, deep [deeper -comp., deepest -sup.], extensive, great [greater -comp., greatest -sup.], heavy [heavier -comp., heaviest -sup.], high [higher -comp., highest -sup.], huge, large [larger -comp., largest -sup.], large scale [large-scale], tremendous, wide [wider -comp., widest -sup.], goodly [goodlier -comp., goodliest -sup.], abysmal, heavyweight [heavy weight], broad [broader -comp., broadest -sup.], of the highest order.

    Ex: If you add to this other access points, such as collections housed in old people's homes or day centres, prisons, hospitals, youth clubs, playgroups etc the coverage is vast.

    Ex: Fiction is a big item for children and also just for ordinary public library users.
    Ex: Like all enumerative schedules, the LC schedules are bulky, extending to some 8000 pages.
    Ex: The need to become familiar with different command languages for different hosts is a considerable barrier to effective retrieval.
    Ex: The world's largest processing department's plans and policies are always of deep interest.
    Ex: The minutely detailed classification is of the type appropriate to an extensive collection.
    Ex: Clearly, great variations can be expected between different indexing languages for different databases.
    Ex: In fact, the area was well served by a very good neighbourhood advice centre which had a heavy workload of advice and information-giving.
    Ex: Lower specificity will be associated with lower precision but high recall.
    Ex: A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex: Serial searching for a string of characters is usually performed on a small subset of a large file.
    Ex: It is in the development of such large-scale services that problems are seen most acutely.
    Ex: There has been tremendous growth in libraries since then, but, fundamentally, it has been possible to build on the foundation that nineteenth-century heroes constructed.
    Ex: The method is sufficiently flexible to allow for wide modifications.
    Ex: However, we must not forget the book which the critics acclaim and which also sells in goodly numbers.
    Ex: The major problem encountered in encouraging young adults to use public libraries is the abysmal lack of specialist young adult librarians = El principal problema que se encuentra para es incentivar a los jóvenes a usar las bibliotecas públicas es la enorme falta de bibliotecarios especialistas en temas relacionados con los adolescentes.
    Ex: Heavyweight information technology firms such as IBM are appearing in the market and challenging traditional players.
    Ex: In 'upper town' streets are broad, quiet, and tree-shaded; the homes are tall and heavy and look like battleships, each anchored in its private sea of grass.
    Ex: I've got to tell you, and I do say this affectionately, but we're talking about a geek of the highest order.
    * a grandes rasgos = broadly, rough draft.
    * a gran escala = large scale [large-scale], massive, on a wide scale, high-volume, wide-scale, on a broad scale, in a big way, on a grand scale.
    * a gran velocidad = at great speed.
    * a lo grande = in a big way, big time, grandly, on a grand scale.
    * armar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * a un gran coste = at (a) great expense.
    * avanzar con gran dificultad = grind on.
    * bastante grande = largish.
    * calabacín grande = marrow, marrow squash.
    * causar una gran sensación = make + a splash.
    * causar un gran alboroto = make + a splash.
    * causar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons, make + a splash.
    * celebrar a lo grande = make + a song and dance about.
    * con gran capacidad = capacious.
    * con gran colorido = brightly coloured.
    * con gran densidad de población = densely populated.
    * con gran dificultad = with great difficulty.
    * con gran esplendor = grandly.
    * con gran iluminación = brightly illuminated.
    * con gran motivación = highly-motivated.
    * con gran sentimiento = earnestly.
    * conseguir en gran medida + Infinitivo = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * contribuir en gran medida a + Infinitivo = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio, go far in + Gerundio, go far towards + Gerundio.
    * con una gran cultura = well-read.
    * con una gran diferencia = by a huge margin.
    * con una gran tradición = long-standing.
    * con un gran número de lectores = widely-read.
    * con un gran suspiro = with a deep sigh.
    * convertirse en un gran problema = grow to + a crisis.
    * correr un gran riesgo = play (for) + high stakes.
    * crear con gran destreza = craft.
    * dar un gran paso adelante = reach + milestone.
    * de gran ahorro energético = energy-saving.
    * de gran belleza = scenic.
    * de gran calibre = high-calibre.
    * de gran calidad = high-quality, high-grade [high grade], high-calibre.
    * de gran capacidad = large-capacity, high capacity.
    * de gran colorido = brightly coloured.
    * de gran corazón = big-hearted.
    * de gran efecto = wide-reaching.
    * de gran éxito comercial = high selling.
    * de gran formato = oversized.
    * de gran impacto = high impact [high-impact].
    * de gran influencia = seminal.
    * de gran lucidez = clear-sighted.
    * de gran lujo = top-class.
    * de gran potencia = high-powered.
    * de gran repercusión = far-reaching, wide-reaching, far-ranging.
    * de gran talento = talented.
    * de gran valor = highly valued, highly valuable.
    * de gran valor histórico = of great historical value.
    * de gran venta = high selling.
    * demasiado grande = oversized.
    * describir a grandes rasgos = paint + a broad picture.
    * desplazarse grandes distancias = travel + long distances.
    * ejercer una gran influencia en = play + a strong hand in.
    * el gran hermano = big brother.
    * el todo es más grande que la suma de sus partes = the whole is greater than the sum of its parts.
    * empresa de grandes derroches = high roller.
    * en gran cantidad = prodigiously.
    * en grandes cantidades = en masse, in good number, in bulk.
    * en grandes números = in record numbers, in record numbers.
    * en gran formato = oversize, oversized.
    * en gran medida = by and large, extensively, greatly, heavily, largely, to a considerable extent, to a high degree, to a large extent, tremendously, vastly, very much, to a great extent, in no small way, to any great degree, in many ways, in large part, in large measure, in no small measure, to a large degree, to a great degree.
    * en gran número = numerously.
    * en gran parte = largely, in large part, in large measure, for the most part, to a great extent, to a great degree.
    * en un gran aprieto = in dire straits.
    * en un gran apuro = in dire straits.
    * esperar una (gran) sorpresa = be in for a (big) surprise.
    * expresión típica de Gran Bretaña = Briticism.
    * extra grande = extra-large.
    * gestión de grandes extensiones para la cría de ganado = range management.
    * gran altura = high altitude.
    * gran aumento = heavy increase.
    * gran bebedor = heavy drinker.
    * gran belleza = scenic beauty.
    * Gran Bretaña = Britain, Great Britain.
    * gran calidad = high standard.
    * gran cantidad de = large crop of, mass of.
    * gran categoría = high standard.
    * gran cosa = big deal.
    * gran danés = Great Dane.
    * Gran Depresión, la = Depression, the, Great Depression, the.
    * grandes almacenes = department store.
    * grandes cantidades de = storerooms of, huge numbers of, huge numbers of, great numbers of.
    * grandes escritores, los = great imaginative writers, the.
    * grandes robles nacen de pequeñas bellotas = great oaks from little acorns grow.
    * grandes sumas de dinero = vast sums of money.
    * grande superficie = shopping mall, shopping complex, shopping centre.
    * grandes y pequeños = great and small.
    * grande y tenebroso = cavernous.
    * gran ducado = grand-duchy.
    * gran espectáculo = extravaganza.
    * gran extensión de tierra dedicada a la cría de animales de pasto = rangeland.
    * gran grupo = constellation.
    * gran mentira = big fat lie.
    * gran nivel = high standard.
    * gran número de = great numbers of.
    * gran pantalla de televisión = large-screen television.
    * gran parte = much.
    * gran parte de = much of.
    * gran peso = heavy weight.
    * gran placer = great pleasure.
    * gran potencia = great power.
    * gran salto adelante = giant leap, great leap forward.
    * gran tiburón blanco = great white shark.
    * gran titular = headline banner.
    * hacer grandes esfuerzos por = take + (great) pains to.
    * hacer grandes progresos = make + great strides.
    * hacer un gran esfuerzo = go out of + Posesivo + way to + Infinitivo.
    * hacer un gran negocio = make + a killing.
    * IGE (Integración a Gran Escala) = LSI (Large Scale Integration).
    * influir en gran medida = become + a force.
    * jaula grande para pájaros = aviary.
    * jugador de grandes apuestas = high roller.
    * la Gran Manzana = the Big Apple.
    * la gran mayoría de = the vast majority of, the bulk of.
    * levantar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * llevarse una (gran) sorpresa = be in for a (big) surprise.
    * lo suficientemente grande = large enough, big enough.
    * más grande = greater.
    * muy grande = big time.
    * Nombre + a gran escala = broad scale + Nombre.
    * no ser gran cosa = not add up to much, add up to + nothing.
    * no ser una gran pérdida = be no great loss.
    * no significar gran cosa = not add up to much.
    * no suponer gran cosa = not add up to much.
    * no valer gran cosa = be no great shakes.
    * pago único y bien grande = fat lump sum.
    * para + Posesivo + gran sorpresa = much to + Posesivo + surprise.
    * pasarlo a lo grande = have + a ball, have + a whale of a time.
    * pasarlo en grande = have + a ball, have + a whale of a time.
    * pasárselo en grande = enjoy + every minute of, love + every minute of it.
    * Pedro el Grande = Peter the Great.
    * pensar a lo grande = think + big.
    * Pie Grande = Bigfoot, Sasquatch.
    * por un gran margen = by a huge margin.
    * producir con gran destreza = craft.
    * provocar un gran alboroto = make + a splash.
    * provocar un gran revuelo = set + the cat among the pigeons, put + the cat among the pigeons.
    * que le presta gran importancia a la cultura = culture-conscious.
    * recorrer grandes distancias = travel + long distances.
    * revista que tiene una gran demanda popular = mass-market journal.
    * ser de gran ayuda para = be a boon to.
    * ser de gran beneficio para = be of great benefit to.
    * ser una gran ayuda = be a tower of strength.
    * ser un gran alivio = be a welcome relief.
    * ser un gran apoyo = be a tower of strength.
    * ser un gran avance = be half the battle.
    * ser un gran paso adelante = be half the battle.
    * taza grande = mug.
    * tener en gran estima = have + a very high regard for.
    * tener gran éxito = hit + a home run, hit it out of + the park, knock it out of + the park.
    * tener gran importancia = be of high significance.
    * tener gran repercusión = be far reaching.
    * tener una gran tradición = have + a long ancestry.
    * tener un gran impacto = have + a big impact.
    * tomar un gran riesgo = play (for) + high stakes.
    * una gran cantidad de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a large degree of, a mass of, a plethora of, a supply of, a vast amount of, a city of, a wealth of, a sea of, a cascade of, an army of, a good many, a huge number of, a great number of, a multitude of, scores of, a host of, a vast corpus of, a whole host of.
    * una gran cantidad y variedad de = a wealth and breadth of.
    * una gran diversidad de = a wide range of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of.
    * una gran experiencia = a wealth of experience.
    * una gran extensión de = a sea of.
    * una gran gama de = a wide range of, a rich tapestry of, a wide band of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * una gran mayoría de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran parte de = a broad population of, a lion's share of.
    * una gran pérdida = a great loss.
    * una gran proporción de = a large proportion of.
    * una gran variedad de = a wide range of, a multiplicity of, a rich tapestry of, a plurality of, a broad variety of, a broad range of, a whole gamut of.
    * un gran espectro de = a wide band of.
    * un gran número de = a good deal of, a great deal of, a plethora of, a wide range of, a full roster of, a fair number of, a great number of, a broad variety of, a wide variety of, a broad range of, a vast corpus of.
    * un gran repertorio de = an arsenal of, an armoury of [armory].
    * un gran volumen de = a vast corpus of.
    * venirle Algo grande a Alguien = get + too big for + Posesivo + breeches.
    * WAN (red de gran alcance) = WAN (wide area network).

    * * *
    A
    1 (en dimensiones) large, big
    se mudaron a una casa más grande they moved to a larger o bigger house
    sus grandes ojos negros her big dark eyes
    un tipo grande, ancho de hombros a big, broad-shouldered guy
    una chica grandota, fortachona ( fam); a big, strong girl, a strapping lass ( BrE colloq)
    tiene la boca/nariz grande she has a big mouth/nose
    2 (en demasía) too big
    ¿esto será grande para Daniel? do you think this is too big for Daniel?
    estos zapatos me quedan or me están grandes these shoes are too big for me
    quedarle or ( Esp) venirle grande a algn «puesto/responsabilidad» to be too much for sb
    B (alto) tall
    ¡qué grande está Andrés! isn't Andrés tall!, hasn't Andrés gotten* tall!
    C ( Geog):
    el Gran Buenos Aires/Bilbao Greater Buenos Aires/Bilbao
    D
    1
    ( esp AmL) ‹niño/chico› (en edad): los más grandes pueden ir solos the older o bigger ones can go on their own
    ya eres grande y puedes comer solito you're a big boy now and you can feed yourself
    cuando sea grande quiero ser bailarina when I grow up I want to be a ballet dancer
    mis hijos ya son grandes my children are all grown up now
    2
    ( Arg) (maduro, mayor): es una mujer grande she isn't a young woman o she's a mature woman
    está saliendo con un tipo grande she's going out with an older guy
    1 (notable, excelente) great
    un gran hombre/artista/vino a great man/artist/wine
    la gran dama del teatro the grande dame of the theater
    los grandes bancos/industriales the big banks/industrialists
    los grandes señores feudales the great feudal lords
    a lo grande in style
    3
    (en importancia): son grandes amigos they're great friends
    grandes fumadores heavy smokers
    F ( fam)
    (increíble): ¡qué cosa más grande! ¡ya te he dicho 20 veces que no lo sé! this is unbelievable! I've told you 20 times already that I don't know!
    ¿no es grande que ahora me echen la culpa a mí? ( iró); and now they blame me; great, isn't it? ( iro)
    G
    1 (en intensidad, grado) great
    me causó una gran pena it caused me great sadness
    me has dado una gran alegría you have made me very happy
    comió con gran apetito she ate hungrily o heartily
    un día de gran calor a very hot day
    los grandes fríos del 47 the great o big freeze of '47
    me llevé un susto más grande … I got such a fright
    para mi gran vergüenza to my great embarrassment
    se produjo una gran explosión there was a powerful explosion
    es un gran honor para mí it is a great honor* for me
    ha sido una temporada de gran éxito it has been a very o a highly successful season
    no corre gran prisa it is not very urgent
    las paredes tienen gran necesidad de una mano de pintura the walls are very much in need of a coat of paint
    2
    (uso enfático): eso es una gran verdad that is absolutely o very true
    ésa es la mentira más grande que he oído that's the biggest lie I've ever heard
    ¡qué gran novedad! ( iró); you don't say! o what a surprise! ( iro)
    H
    1 (en número) ‹familia› large, big; ‹clase› big
    la gran mayoría de los votantes the great o vast majority of the voters
    dedican gran parte de su tiempo a la investigación they devote much of o a great deal of their time to research
    esto se debe en gran parte a que … this is largely due to the fact that …
    2
    (elevado): a gran velocidad at high o great speed
    volar a gran altura to fly at a great height
    un edificio de gran altura a very tall building
    un gran número de personas a large number of people
    objetos de gran valor objects of great value
    en grande: lo pasamos or nos divertimos en grande we had a great time ( colloq)
    Compuestos:
    masculine wide-angle lens
    el gran capital big business
    masculine Great Dane
    la Gran Depresión the Great Depression
    ( Astron): la gran explosión the Big Bang
    la Gran Guerra the Great War
    masculine Big Brother
    el gran hermano te observa or te vigila Big Brother is watching you
    masculine Grand Master
    masculine grand master
    masculine international grand master
    feminine grand opera
    masculine Grand Prix
    el gran público the general public
    el gran simpático the sympathetic nervous system
    feminine ( Esp) large supermarket, hypermarket ( BrE)
    mpl department store
    masculine, feminine
    A (de la industria, el comercio) big o leading name, leading player
    uno de los tres grandes de la industria automovilística one of the big three names o one of the big three in the car industry
    B ( esp AmL)
    1
    (mayor): quiero ir con los grandes I want to go with the big boys/girls
    la grande ya está casada their eldest (daughter) is already married
    2 (adulto) grown-up
    Compuesto:
    (Spanish) grandee o nobleman
    ( RPl)
    la grande the big prize, the jackpot
    sacarse la grande (literal) to win the big prize o the jackpot
    se sacó la grande con ese marido she hit the jackpot with that husband
    * * *

     

    grande adjetivo
    ◊ gran is used before singular nouns

    1
    a) ( en dimensiones) ‹casa/área/nariz› big, large;


    unos grande almacenes a department store


    c) ( en número) ‹ familia› large, big;

    ‹ clase› big;
    la gran parte or mayoría the great majority
    2
    a) ( alto) tall;

    ◊ ¡qué grande está Andrés! isn't Andrés tall!

    b) ( en edad):


    ya son grandes they are all grown up now
    3 (Geog):

    4 ( delante del n)
    a) (notable, excelente) great;


    b) ( poderoso) big;


    a lo grande in style
    5
    a) (en intensidad, grado) ‹pena/honor/ventaja› great;

    ‹ explosión› powerful;
    ◊ ¡me llevé un susto más grande … ! I got such a fright!;

    una temporada de gran éxito a very o a highly successful season;
    son grandes amigos they're great friends;
    eso es una gran verdad that is absolutely true;
    ¡qué mentira más grande! that's a complete lie!
    b) ( elevado):

    ◊ a gran velocidad at high o great speed;

    volar a gran altura to fly at a great height;
    un gran número de personas a large number of people;
    objetos de gran valor objects of great value;
    en grande: lo pasamos en grande we had a great time (colloq)
    ■ sustantivo masculino, femenino
    a) ( mayor):


    b) ( adulto):


    grande adjetivo
    1 (tamaño) big, large
    grandes almacenes, department stores
    2 (cantidad) large
    3 fig (fuerte, intenso) great: es un gran músico, he is a great musician
    ♦ Locuciones: a lo grande, in style
    figurado pasarlo en grande, to have a great time
    ' grande' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abarcar
    - alfombra
    - ampliar
    - ampliación
    - armatoste
    - así
    - bastante
    - bestial
    - bloque
    - buena
    - bueno
    - cabezón
    - cabezona
    - cabezudo
    - cajón
    - calabacín
    - campeonato
    - cantidad
    - canto
    - ciudad
    - colosal
    - consideración
    - fenomenal
    - formidable
    - gran
    - hermosa
    - hermoso
    - incalculable
    - ingeniosa
    - ingenioso
    - mía
    - mío
    - monstruosa
    - monstruoso
    - monumental
    - nuestra
    - nuestro
    - pila
    - puerta
    - quedar
    - señor
    - suficientemente
    - suma
    - sumo
    - terraza
    - tirada
    - tremenda
    - tremendo
    - venir
    - bailar
    English:
    abnormally
    - above
    - ample
    - army
    - awful
    - bag
    - baggy
    - bay
    - big
    - boat
    - border
    - box
    - breaker
    - brush
    - bulk
    - carve
    - cauldron
    - cushion
    - deposit
    - enough
    - extend
    - grand
    - great
    - grow
    - hers
    - in
    - integrate
    - large
    - lion
    - manufacturer
    - marrow
    - mighty
    - mine
    - outrank
    - overgrown
    - paving stone
    - place
    - roller
    - set on
    - set upon
    - slight
    - spanking
    - style
    - tablespoonful
    - tea urn
    - temptation
    - terrific
    - time
    - to
    - tub
    * * *
    grande gran is used instead of grande before singular nouns (e.g. gran hombre great man).
    ♦ adj
    1. [de tamaño] big, large;
    este traje me está o [m5] me queda grande this suit is too big for me;
    el gran Buenos Aires/Santiago greater Buenos Aires/Santiago, the metropolitan area of Buenos Aires/Santiago;
    Fig
    el cargo le viene grande he's not up to the job;
    Fam
    pagó con un billete de los grandes he paid with a large note
    grandes almacenes department store; Fot gran angular wide-angle lens;
    la Gran Barrera de Coral the Great Barrier Reef;
    Gran Bretaña Great Britain;
    gran danés Great Dane;
    Hist la Gran Depresión the Great Depression;
    gran ducado grand duchy;
    la Gran Explosión the Big Bang;
    la Gran Guerra the Great War;
    los Grandes Lagos the Great Lakes;
    gran maestro [en ajedrez] grand master;
    Hist Gran Mogol Mogul;
    la Gran Muralla (China) the Great Wall (of China);
    Dep Gran Premio Grand Prix; Hist el Gran Salto Adelante the Great Leap Forward;
    gran slam [en tenis] grand slam;
    Esp Com gran superficie hypermarket
    2. [de altura] tall;
    ¡qué grande está tu hermano! your brother's really grown!
    3. [en importancia] great;
    una gran mujer a great woman;
    los grandes bancos the major banks;
    la gran mayoría está a favor del proyecto the great o overwhelming majority are in favour of the project;
    el éxito se debe en gran parte a su esfuerzo the success is largely due to her efforts, the success is in no small measure due to her efforts
    4. [en intensidad] great;
    es un gran mentiroso he's a real liar;
    ¡qué alegría más grande! what joy!
    5. Fam [adulto]
    cuando sea grande quiere ser doctora she wants to be a doctor when she grows up;
    me dijeron que todavía no soy grande como para salir solo they told me I'm not big enough to go out on my own yet
    6. Méx, RP [de edad]
    cuando se casó ya era grande she was already quite old when she got married;
    siempre se llevó bien con gente más grande he always got on well with older people
    7. RP Fam [fantástico] fantastic, Br brilliant
    8. RP Irónico [genial] great;
    ayer le hice un favor y hoy me vuelve la espalda, ¡grande! great! I did him a favour and now he doesn't want to know!
    9. Comp
    Fam
    hacer algo a lo grande to do sth in a big way o in style;
    vivir a lo grande to live in style;
    pasarlo en grande to have a great time
    ♦ nm
    1. [noble] grandee
    Grande de España = one of highest-ranking members of Spanish nobility
    2. [persona, entidad importante]
    uno de los grandes del sector one of the major players in the sector;
    los tres grandes de la liga the big three in the league;
    uno de los grandes de la literatura mexicana one of the big names in Mexican literature
    3. Fam
    grandes [adultos] grown-ups
    ♦ nf
    RP [en lotería] first prize, jackpot;
    sacarse la grande [en lotería] to win first prize o the jackpot;
    se sacó la grande con ese trabajo [tuvo buena suerte] she hit the jackpot with that job;
    con esa nuera que tiene le tocó la grande [tuvo mala suerte] you've got to feel sorry for her having a daughter-in-law like that
    ♦ interj
    RP Fam [fantástico] great!
    * * *
    I adj
    1 big, large;
    me viene grande the jacket is too big for me;
    el cargo le viene grande the job is too much for him
    2
    :
    a lo grande in style;
    pasarlo en grande have a great time
    II m/f
    1 L.Am. ( adulto) grown-up, adult;
    grandes y pequeños young and old
    2 ( mayor) eldest
    * * *
    1) : large, big
    un libro grande: a big book
    2) alto: tall
    3) notable: great
    un gran autor: a great writer
    con gran placer: with great pleasure
    5) : old, grown-up
    hijos grandes: grown children
    * * *
    grande adj
    1. (tamaño) big [comp. bigger; superl. biggest]
    ¿es muy grande el jardín? is the garden very big?
    2. (número, cantidad) large
    3. (importante) great

    Spanish-English dictionary > grande

  • 7 matriz

    adj.
    1 parent (empresa).
    casa matriz head office
    2 holding.
    La compañía matriz The holding company.
    3 matrix.
    f.
    1 womb (anatomy).
    2 (check) stub.
    3 mold (molde).
    4 matrix (math & computing).
    5 die, swage, hub, swage block.
    6 parent, parent company.
    * * *
    1 ANATOMÍA womb
    2 TÉCNICA mould (US mold)
    3 (original) original, master copy
    4 (de talonario) stub, counterfoil
    5 MATEMÁTICAS matrix
    1 principal
    * * *
    1. SF
    1) (Anat) womb, uterus
    2) (Téc) mould, mold (EEUU), die; (Tip) matrix
    3) [de talonario] stub, counterfoil
    4) (Jur) original, master copy
    5) (Mat) matrix; (Inform) array
    2.
    ADJ

    casa matriz — (Com) (=sede) head office; (=compañía) parent company; (=convento) parent house

    * * *
    1)
    a) ( útero) womb, uterus
    b) ( molde) mold*
    c) ( de documento) original; ( de disco) master
    d) ( de talonario) stub
    e) ( de un test) master copy
    f) ( esténcil) stencil
    2) (Inf, Mat) matrix
    3) ( de empresa) headquarters (sing or pl)
    * * *
    = hose, master, matrix [matrixes/matrices, -pl.], type image, matrix [matrixes/matrices, -pl.].
    Nota: En imprenta, molde usado para la fundición de los tipos de imprenta.
    Ex. Further down still the shank of the spindle, rounded again, entered the hose, which was an oblong rectangular wooden box, 25 cm. long by 12.5 cm. square bored with a hole to take the spindle down its long axis.
    Ex. The great significance of a fully developed network will be that it will relieve libraries of the necessity of maintaining their own copies of the master data base.
    Ex. The combination of material type and borrower type specifies one cell in each of these matrices.
    Ex. An edition is all those copies of an item produced from substantially the same type image, whether by direct contact or by photographic method.
    Ex. The rate of production of ordinary matrices was slightly increased by the use of a screw press instead of a hammer for striking the punches, and of simple jigs for justification = El ritmo de producción de las matrices normales aumentó ligeramente por el uso de las prensas de tornillo en lugar de un martillo para golpear los tipos movibles y de unas simples plantillas de guía para la justificación.
    ----
    * documento matriz = master document.
    * matrices = matrices [matrix, -sing.].
    * matriz de puntos de impacto = impact dot matrix.
    * matriz de similitud = similarity matrix.
    * número matriz = master number.
    * Procesador de Matrices de Texto (TAP) = Text Array Processor (TAP).
    * registro matriz = master record.
    * * *
    1)
    a) ( útero) womb, uterus
    b) ( molde) mold*
    c) ( de documento) original; ( de disco) master
    d) ( de talonario) stub
    e) ( de un test) master copy
    f) ( esténcil) stencil
    2) (Inf, Mat) matrix
    3) ( de empresa) headquarters (sing or pl)
    * * *
    = hose, master, matrix [matrixes/matrices, -pl.], type image, matrix [matrixes/matrices, -pl.].
    Nota: En imprenta, molde usado para la fundición de los tipos de imprenta.

    Ex: Further down still the shank of the spindle, rounded again, entered the hose, which was an oblong rectangular wooden box, 25 cm. long by 12.5 cm. square bored with a hole to take the spindle down its long axis.

    Ex: The great significance of a fully developed network will be that it will relieve libraries of the necessity of maintaining their own copies of the master data base.
    Ex: The combination of material type and borrower type specifies one cell in each of these matrices.
    Ex: An edition is all those copies of an item produced from substantially the same type image, whether by direct contact or by photographic method.
    Ex: The rate of production of ordinary matrices was slightly increased by the use of a screw press instead of a hammer for striking the punches, and of simple jigs for justification = El ritmo de producción de las matrices normales aumentó ligeramente por el uso de las prensas de tornillo en lugar de un martillo para golpear los tipos movibles y de unas simples plantillas de guía para la justificación.
    * documento matriz = master document.
    * matrices = matrices [matrix, -sing.].
    * matriz de puntos de impacto = impact dot matrix.
    * matriz de similitud = similarity matrix.
    * número matriz = master number.
    * Procesador de Matrices de Texto (TAP) = Text Array Processor (TAP).
    * registro matriz = master record.

    * * *
    A
    1 (útero) womb, uterus
    2 (molde) mold*
    3 (de un documento) original; (de un disco) master
    4 (de un talonario) stub, counterfoil
    5 (de un test) master copy
    6 (esténcil) stencil
    B ( Mat) matrix
    C (de una empresa) headquarters ( sing o pl); (de una orden religiosa) mother church
    * * *

     

    matriz sustantivo femenino

    b) ( molde) mold( conjugate mold)


    matriz sustantivo femenino
    1 Anat womb, uterus
    2 (molde) mould
    3 Mat matrix
    ' matriz' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    casa
    - talón
    English:
    matrix
    - parent company
    - stub
    - womb
    - counter
    - master
    - parent
    - uterus
    * * *
    ♦ nf
    1. Anat womb, Espec uterus
    2. [molde] mould
    3. Imprenta [espacio] character
    4. [de talonario] (cheque) stub
    5. Informát matrix
    matriz activa active matrix
    6. Mat matrix
    7. [empresa] parent company
    ♦ adj
    [empresa] parent;
    casa matriz head office
    * * *
    f
    1 MAT, TÉC, GEOL matrix
    2 ANAT womb
    * * *
    1) : uterus, womb
    2) : original, master copy
    3) : main office, headquarters
    4) : stub (of a check)
    5) : matrix
    matriz de puntos: dot matrix

    Spanish-English dictionary > matriz

  • 8 grand

    grand, e [gʀɑ̃, gʀɑ̃d]
    1. adjective
       a. ( = de haute taille) tall
       b. ( = plus âgé) son grand frère his older or big (inf) brother
    • tu es grand/grande maintenant you're a big boy/girl now
       c. (en dimensions) big, large ; [bras, distance, voyage, enjambées] long ; [avenue, marge] wide
       d. (en nombre, en quantité) [vitesse, poids, valeur, puissance] great ; [nombre, quantité] large ; [famille] large, big
       e. ( = intense) [bruit, cri] loud ; [froid, chaleur] intense ; [vent] strong ; [danger, plaisir, pauvreté] great
       f. ( = riche, puissant) [pays, firme, banquier, industriel] leading
       g. ( = important) great ; [ville, travail] big
    • je t'annonce une grande nouvelle ! I've got some great news!
       h. ( = principal) main
    • la grande difficulté consiste à... the main difficulty lies in...
       i. (intensif) [travailleur, collectionneur, ami, rêveur] great ; [buveur, fumeur] heavy ; [mangeur] big
       j. ( = remarquable) great
       k. ( = de gala) [réception, dîner] grand
       l. ( = noble) [âme] noble ; [pensée, principe] lofty
    • grand bien vous fasse ! much good may it do you!
    2. adverb
       b. ( = largement) ouvrir (en) grand [+ porte] to open wide ; [+ robinet] to turn full on
    3. masculine noun
       a. ( = élève) senior boy
       b. (terme d'affection) viens, mon grand come here, son
       c. ( = personne puissante) les grands de ce monde men in high places
    4. feminine noun
       a. ( = élève) senior girl
    ► la grande Bleue or bleue the Med (inf)
    ━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━
    The grandes écoles are competitive-entrance higher education establishments where engineering, business administration and other subjects are taught to a very high standard. The most prestigious include « l'École Polytechnique » (engineering), the three « Écoles normales supérieures » (arts and sciences), « l'ÉNA » (the civil service college), and « HEC » (business administration).
    Pupils prepare for entrance to the grandes écoles after their « baccalauréat » in two years of « classes préparatoires ». → CLASSES PRÉPARATOIRES  CONCOURS  ÉCOLE NATIONALE D'ADMINISTRATION
    * * *

    1.
    grande gʀɑ̃, gʀɑ̃d adjectif
    1) ( de dimensions importantes) ( en hauteur) tall; (en longueur, durée) long; ( en largeur) wide; (en étendue, volume) big
    2) (nombreux, abondant) large, big

    laver à grande eau — to wash [something] in plenty of running water [légumes]; to wash [something] down [sol]

    3) ( à un degré élevé) [rêveur, collectionneur, ami] great; [tricheur, joueur] big; [buveur, fumeur] heavy
    4) ( important) [découverte, expédition, nouvelle] great; [date] important; [rôle] major; [problème, décision] big

    la grande majorité — the great ou vast majority

    5) ( principal) main
    6) ( de premier plan) [société, marque] leading
    7) (brillant, remarquable) [peintre, vin, cause] great; [cœur, âme] noble

    Louis le Grand — Louis the Great; esprit

    8) ( âgé) [frère, sœur] elder; [élève] senior GB, older; ( adulte)

    les grandes classes — École the senior forms GB, the upper classes US

    9) ( qualifiant une mesure) [hauteur, longueur, distance, valeur] great; [pointure, quantité, étendue] large; [vitesse] high
    10) (extrême, fort) [bonté, amitié, danger, intérêt] great; [bruit] loud; [froid] severe; [chaleur] intense; [vent] strong, high; [tempête] big, violent

    à grands cris — loudly; cas, remède

    11) ( de rang social élevé) [famille, nom] great
    12) ( grandiose) [réception, projet] grand
    13) ( emphatique) [mot] big; [phrase] high-sounding

    et voilà, tout de suite les grands mots — there you go, straight off the deep end


    2.
    nom masculin, féminin ( enfant) big boy/girl; École senior GB ou older pupil

    3.
    adverbe wide

    ouvrir grand ses oreilles — fig to prick up one's ears


    4.
    nom masculin

    les cinq grands — Politique the Big Five


    5.
    en grand locution adverbiale
    Phrasal Verbs:
    * * *
    ɡʀɑ̃, ɡʀɑ̃d grand, -e
    1. adj
    1) (= de haute taille) tall

    Il est grand pour son âge. — He's tall for his age.

    2) (= aîné)

    C'est sa grande sœur. — She's his big sister.

    3) (= adulte)

    Il est assez grand pour... — He's old enough to...

    4) (= gros, vaste, large) big, large
    5) (importance, stature) great

    C'est un grand ami à moi. — He's a great friend of mine.

    6) (ampleur, degré)

    les grands blessés; Les grands blessés ont été emmenés à l'hôpital en hélicoptère. — The severely injured were taken to hospital by helicopter.

    Ça te fera beaucoup de bien d'être au grand air. — It'll be very good for you to be out in the open air.

    2. adv
    3. nm/f
    1) (= élève, enfant) big boy, big girl

    Il est chez les grands maintenant. — He's in the senior school now.

    C'est une grande, elle peut y aller seule. — She's a big girl now, she can go on her own.

    2) (= personnage)
    4. nm

    en grand [ouvrir] — wide

    * * *
    A adj
    1 ( de dimensions importantes) ( en hauteur) [personne, arbre, tour, cierge] tall; (en longueur, durée) [bras, enjambée, promenade, voyage] long; ( en largeur) [angle, marge] wide; (en étendue, volume) [lac, ville, salle, trou, édifice, paquet] large, big; [tas, feu] big; ( démesuré) [pied, nez, bouche] big; un homme (très) grand a (very) tall man; un grand homme brun, un homme grand et brun a tall dark man; plus grand que nature larger than life; ouvrir de grands yeux to open one's eyes wide;
    2 (nombreux, abondant) [famille, foule] large, big; [fortune] large; grande braderie big sale; pas grand monde not many people; faire de grandes dépenses to spend a lot of money; il fait grand jour it's broad daylight; laver à grande eau to wash [sth] in plenty of running water [légumes]; to wash [sth] down [sol]; à grand renfort de publicité with much publicity;
    3 ( à un degré élevé) [rêveur, collectionneur, travailleur, ami, ennemi, pécheur] great; [tricheur, joueur, lâcheur, idiot] big; [buveur, fumeur] heavy; grand amateur de ballet great ballet lover; c'est un grand timide he's very shy; les grands malades very sick people; c'est un grand cardiaque he has a serious heart condition;
    4 ( important) [découverte, migration, expédition, événement, nouvelle, honneur] great; [date] important; [rôle] major; [problème, décision] big; ( principal) main; c'est un grand jour pour elle it's a big day for her; une grande partie de la maison a large part of the house; une grande partie des habitants many of the inhabitants; la grande majorité the great ou vast majority; ⇒ scène;
    5 ( principal) main; le grand escalier the main staircase; le grand problème/obstacle the main ou major problem/obstacle; les grands axes routiers the main ou trunk GB roads; les grands points du discours the main points of the speech; les grandes lignes d'une politique the broad lines of a policy;
    6 ( de premier plan) Écon, Pol [pays, société, industriel, marque] leading; les grandes industries the big industries;
    7 (brillant, remarquable) [peintre, œuvre, civilisation, vin, cause] great; [cœur, âme] noble; c'est un grand homme he's a great man; les grands écrivains great authors; un grand nom de la musique a great musician; un grand monsieur du théâtre a great gentleman of the stage; Louis/Pierre le Grand Louis/Peter the Great; les grands noms du cinéma/de la littérature indienne the big names of the cinema/of Indian literature; de grande classe [produit] high-class; [exploit] admirable; ⇒ esprit;
    8 ( âgé) [frère, sœur] elder; [élève] senior GB, older; ( adulte) grown-up; mon grand frère my elder brother; les grandes classes Scol the senior forms GB, the upper classes US; quand il sera grand when he grows up; mes enfants sont grands my children are quite old; une grande fille comme toi! a big girl like you!; 12 ans! tu es assez grand pour te débrouiller 12 years old! you're old enough to cope;
    9 ( qualifiant une mesure) [hauteur, longueur, distance, poids, valeur, âge] great; [dimensions, taille, pointure, quantité, nombre, étendue] large; [vitesse] high; [kilomètre, mois, heure] good; il est grand temps que tu partes it's high time you were off ou you went;
    10 (intense, extrême, fort) [bonté, lâcheté, pauvreté, amitié, chagrin, faim, danger, différence, intérêt] great; [bruit] great, loud; [froid] severe; [chaleur] intense; [vent] strong, high; [tempête] big, violent; avec grand plaisir with great ou much pleasure; dans le plus grand secret in great secrecy; d'une grande bêtise/timidité very ou extremely stupid/shy; à ma grande honte/surprise much to my shame/surprise; sans grand espoir/enthousiasme without much hope/enthusiasm; sans grande importance not very important; il n'y a pas grand mal à cela/à faire there isn't much harm in that/in doing; avoir grand faim/soif to be very hungry/thirsty; avoir grand besoin de to be badly in need of; ça te ferait le plus grand bien it would do you a world of good; à grands cris loudly; ⇒ cas, remède;
    11 ( de rang social élevé) [famille, nom] great; grande dame great lady; la grande bourgeoisie the upper middle class;
    12 ( grandiose) [réception] grand; grands projets grand designs; avoir grande allure, avoir grand air to look very impressive;
    13 ( emphatique) [mot] big; [phrase] high-sounding; un grand merci a big thank you; faire de grands gestes to wave one's arms about; et voilà, tout de suite les grands mots there you go, straight off the deep end.
    B nm,f
    1 ( enfant) big boy/girl; Scol senior GB ou older pupil; il a fait ça tout seul comme un grand he did it all by himself like a big boy; il fait le ménage comme un grand he does the housework like a grown-up; pour les grands et les petits for old and young alike;
    C adv wide; ouvrir grand la bouche to open one's mouth wide; ouvrir tout grand les bras to throw one's arms open; les fenêtres sont grand(es) ouvertes the windows are wide open; ouvrir la porte toute grande to open the door wide; ouvrir grand ses oreilles fig to prick up one's ears; ouvrir tout grand son cœur fig to open one's heart; les bottes chaussent grand the boots are large-fitting; leurs vêtements taillent grand their clothes are cut on the large side; voir grand fig to think big.
    D nm ( pays) big power; ( entreprise) leader, big name; les grands de ce monde the great and the good; Pol the world's leaders; les cinq grands Pol the Big Five; les grands de l'automobile the top car manufacturers; c'est un grand de la publicité he's big in advertising.
    E en grand loc adv [ouvrir] wide, completely; faire de l'élevage en grand to breed animals on a large scale; quand ils reçoivent, ils font les choses en grand when they entertain they do things on the grand scale or they really go to town○.
    grand argentier Hist royal treasurer; hum keeper of the nation's purse, Finance minister; le grand art alchemy; grand banditisme organized crime; grand bassin ( de piscine) main pool; Anat upper pelvis; grand cacatois main royal sail; grand caniche standard poodle; le grand capital Écon big money, big investors pl; grand commis de l'État top civil servant; grand coq de bruyère capercaillie; grand corbeau raven; grand couturier couturier; grand débutant absolute beginner; grand duc Zool eagle owl; grand écart Danse, Sport splits (sg); faire le grand écart to do the splits; le grand écran the big screen; grand électeur ( en France) elector who votes in the elections for the French Senate; ( aux États-Unis) presidential elector; grand ensemble high-density housing complex; la vie dans les grands ensembles high-rise living; grand d'Espagne Spanish grandee; grand foc outer jib; grand frais Météo moderate gale; grand hunier main topsail; grand hunier fixe lower main topsail; grand hunier volant upper main topsail; grand invalide civil, GIC civilian who is registered severely disabled; grand invalide de guerre, GIG Prot Soc ex-serviceman who is registered severely disabled; le grand large Naut the high seas (pl); grand magasin Comm department store; grand maître ( aux échecs) grand master; grand maître de l'ordre des Templiers Hist Grand Master of the Knights Templar; grand mât Naut mainmast; le grand monde high society; le Grand Nord Géog the Far North; Grand Œuvre Great Work; grand officier de la Légion d'Honneur high-ranking officer of the Legion of HonourGB; le Grand Orient the Grand Lodge of France; grand panda giant panda; Grand Pardon Day of Atonement; grand patron Méd senior consultant GB, head doctor US; grand perroquet Naut main topgallant sail; grand prêtre Relig, fig high priest; grand prix Courses Aut, Sport grand prix; le grand public the general public; Comm produit grand public consumer product; grand quart Naut six-hour watch; Grand quartier général, GQG Mil General Headquarters, GHQ; grand quotidien Presse big national daily; grand roque Jeux ( aux échecs) castling long; le Grand Siècle Hist the 17th century (in France); grand teint colourfastGB; grand tétras capercaillie; grand tourisme Courses Aut, Aut GT, gran turismo; le Grand Turc the Sultan; grand veneur Chasse master of the hounds; grande Armée Hist Grande Armée (Napoleon's army); grande Baie Australienne Géog Great Australian Bight; la grande banlieue the outer suburbs (pl); Grande Barrière (de Corail) Géog Great Barrier Reef; la grande bleue the sea; la grande cuisine Culin haute cuisine; grande distribution Écon volume retailing; grand école higher education institution; la Grande Guerre Hist the First World War; grande gueule○ loud mouth○; grande hune Naut maintop; la grande muette the army; la grande muraille de Chine Géog the Great Wall of China; grande personne grown-up, adult; la grande presse Presse the popular dailies (pl); grande puissance Pol superpower; grande roue ( de foire) big wheel GB, Ferris wheel US; grande série Comm mass production; fabriqué en grande série mass-produced; grande surface Comm supermarket; grandes eaux fountains; fig ( pleurs) waterworks; dès qu'on la gronde, ce sont les grandes eaux the minute you tell her off, she turns on the waterworks; grandes lignes Rail main train routes; grandes marées spring tides; grandes ondes Radio long wave (sg); Grandes Plaines Géog Great Plains; les grands blessés the seriously injured; grands corps de l'État Admin senior branches of the civil service; grands espaces Écol open spaces; grands fauves Zool big cats; grands fonds Naut ocean depths; les grands froids the cold of winter; Grands Lacs Géog Great Lakes; grands singes Zool great apes; ⇒ école, voyage.
    ⓘ Grande école A prestigious third-level institution where admission is usually by competitive entrance examination or concours. Places are much sought after as they are widely considered to guarantee more promising career prospects than the standard university institutions. Many grandes écoles specialize in particular disciplines or fields of study, e.g. ENA, Sciences Po, etc.
    ( féminin grande) [grɑ̃, grɑ̃d] (devant nom masculin commençant par voyelle ou h muet [grɑ̃t]) adjectif
    A.[ASPECT QUANTITATIF]
    1. [de taille élevée - adulte] tall ; [ - enfant] tall, big
    2. [de grandes dimensions - objet, salle, ville] big, large ; [ - distance] long
    grand A/B/C capital A/B/C
    une grande tour a high ou tall tower
    un grand fleuve a long ou big river
    3. [d'un certain âge - être humain] big
    [aîné - frère, sœur] big
    [au terme de sa croissance - personne] grown-up ; [ - animal] fully grown, adult
    4. [qui dure longtemps] long
    5. [intense, considérable] great
    pendant les grandes chaleurs in high summer, in ou at the height of summer
    un grand incendie a major ou great fire
    6. [pour qualifier une mesure] large, great
    la grande majorité de the great ou vast majority of
    7. [entier]
    elle m'a fait attendre une grande heure/semaine she made me wait a good hour/a good week
    B.[ASPECT QUALITATIF]
    1. [important] great, major
    les grands problèmes de notre temps the main ou major ou key issues of our time
    2. [acharné, invétéré] great, keen
    les grands blessés/brûlés/invalides the seriously wounded/burned/disabled
    3. [puissant, influent - banque] top ; [ - industriel] top, leading, major ; [ - propriétaire, famille] important ; [ - personnage] great
    4. [dans une hiérarchie]
    les grands dignitaires du régime the leading ou important dignitaries of the regime
    5. [noble]
    avoir grand air ou grande allure to carry oneself well, to be imposing
    6. [généralementéreux]
    il a un grand cœur he's big-hearted, he has a big heart
    7. [exagéré] big
    grands mots high-sounding words, high-flown language
    8. [fameux, reconnu] great
    un grand journaliste a great ou top journalist
    les grandes dates de l'histoire de France the great ou most significant dates in French history
    10. [omnipotent, suprême] great
    C.[EN INTENSIF]
    sans grand enthousiasme/intérêt without much enthusiasm/interest
    sa grande fierté, c'est son jardin he's very proud of ou he takes great pride in his garden
    un grand merci à ta sœur lots of thanks to ou a big thank you to your sister
    toute la famille au grand complet the whole family, every single member of the family
    jamais, au grand jamais je n'accepterai never in a million years will I accept
    à sa grande surprise much to his surprise, to his great surprise
    ————————
    , grande [grɑ̃, grɑ̃d] (devant nom masculin commençant par voyelle ou h muet [grɑ̃t]) nom masculin, nom féminin
    1. [enfant - d'un certain âge]
    [en appellatif]
    merci mon grand! thanks, son!
    allons, ma grande, ne pleure pas! come on now, love, don't cry!
    comme un grand: je me débrouillerai tout seul, comme un grand/toute seule, comme une grande I'll manage on my own, like a big boy/a big girl
    2. [adulte - généralement] grown-up, adult
    [en appellatif]
    alors, ma grande, tu as pu te reposer un peu? well dear, did you manage to get some rest?
    [personne de grande taille]
    pour la photo, les grands se mettront derrière for the photo, tall people ou the taller people will stand at the back
    ————————
    adverbe
    1. [vêtement]
    tailler grand: ça devrait vous aller, ça taille grand it should fit you, it's cut large
    3. [largement]
    4. ART
    ————————
    nom masculin
    1. PHILOSOPHIE → link=infiniment infiniment
    2. [entrepreneur, industriel]
    les grands de l'automobile the major ou leading car manufacturers
    ————————
    grands nom masculin pluriel
    ÉCONOMIE & POLITIQUE
    ————————
    en grand locution adverbiale
    [complètement] on a large scale
    grande école nom féminin
    grand ensemble nom masculin
    housing scheme (UK), housing project (US)
    grande surface nom féminin
    The grandes écoles are relatively small and highly respected higher education establishments. Admission is usually only possible after two years of intensive preparatory studies and a competitive entrance examination. Most have close links with industry. The grandes écoles include l'École des hautes études commerciales or HEC (management and business), l'École polytechnique or l'X (engineering) and l'École normale supérieure (teacher training).

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > grand

  • 9 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 10 pantalones

    m.pl.
    1 pants, slacks.
    Ponerse los pantalones (Coll.) to show who is the boss (generally applied to the man of the house)
    Llevar los pantalones (Coll.) to wear the pants, to be the head of a household
    2 man, male. (Andes)
    3 guts, courage. (Caribbean)
    * * *
    noun m. plural
    pants, trousers
    * * *
    masculino plural, pantalón masculino pants (pl) (AmE), trousers (pl) (BrE)

    llevar los pantalones — to wear the pants o trousers

    tener or llevar bien puestos los pantalones — to be master in one's own home

    * * *
    = trousers, slacks, breeches, pants.
    Ex. He got up, and, putting hands in the pockets of his trousers, began to walk around the room.
    Ex. The head of reference told me that he's going to see about a dress code for the staff, prohibiting slacks for women.
    Ex. The user asked for a book about General Wolfe but he said: `I do not want to know about his battles -- I can learn all about those from the histories, I want something that will tell me the colour of the breeches he wore' = El usuario pidió un libro sobre el General Wolfe aunque dijo: "No quiero conocer su batallas, eso lo puedo averiguar en los libros de historia, quiero algo que me diga el color de los calzones que llevaba".
    Ex. Previously a hearty eater who may have been a few pounds overweight, food now has no meaning for him and he has seen his pants size diminish two sizes.
    ----
    * pantalones acampanados = flares.
    * pantalones anchos = baggy pants.
    * pantalones bombachos = breeches, knickerbockers.
    * pantalones de campana = flares.
    * pantalones de media caña = knee breeches, jodhpurs.
    * pantalones de montar = riding breeches, jodhpurs.
    * pantalones de pana = curduroy trousers.
    * pantalones largos = long pants.
    * pantalones lisos = flat-front pants.
    * pantalones vaqueros = blue jeans.
    * tabla de planchar pantalones = trousers press.
    * * *
    masculino plural, pantalón masculino pants (pl) (AmE), trousers (pl) (BrE)

    llevar los pantalones — to wear the pants o trousers

    tener or llevar bien puestos los pantalones — to be master in one's own home

    * * *
    = trousers, slacks, breeches, pants.

    Ex: He got up, and, putting hands in the pockets of his trousers, began to walk around the room.

    Ex: The head of reference told me that he's going to see about a dress code for the staff, prohibiting slacks for women.
    Ex: The user asked for a book about General Wolfe but he said: `I do not want to know about his battles -- I can learn all about those from the histories, I want something that will tell me the colour of the breeches he wore' = El usuario pidió un libro sobre el General Wolfe aunque dijo: "No quiero conocer su batallas, eso lo puedo averiguar en los libros de historia, quiero algo que me diga el color de los calzones que llevaba".
    Ex: Previously a hearty eater who may have been a few pounds overweight, food now has no meaning for him and he has seen his pants size diminish two sizes.
    * pantalones acampanados = flares.
    * pantalones anchos = baggy pants.
    * pantalones bombachos = breeches, knickerbockers.
    * pantalones de campana = flares.
    * pantalones de media caña = knee breeches, jodhpurs.
    * pantalones de montar = riding breeches, jodhpurs.
    * pantalones de pana = curduroy trousers.
    * pantalones largos = long pants.
    * pantalones lisos = flat-front pants.
    * pantalones vaqueros = blue jeans.
    * tabla de planchar pantalones = trousers press.

    * * *
    pants (pl) ( AmE), trousers (pl) ( BrE)
    pantalones de pinzas or pinzados pleated pants o trousers
    ponte los pantalones azules put on your blue pants o trousers
    se compró unos pantalones he bought a pair of pants o trousers
    se vuelve loca cuando ve unos pantalones she goes wild over anything in trousers ( colloq)
    llevar los pantalones to wear the pants o trousers
    tener or llevar bien puestos los pantalones to be master in one's own home
    Compuestos:
    baggy pants o trousers (pl)
    shorts (pl), short pants o trousers (pl)
    (Chi, Per) sweatpants, sweats (pl) ( AmE colloq)
    ( Esp) sweatpants, sweats (pl) ( AmE colloq)
    (Chi, Méx) jeans (pl)
    overalls (pl) ( AmE), dungarees (pl) ( BrE)
    long pants o trousers (pl)
    jeans (pl)
    cropped pants o trousers (pl)
    jeans (pl)
    stretch ski-pants (pl)
    * * *

    pantalones sustantivo masculino plural,
    ◊ pantalón sustantivo masculino

    pants (pl) (AmE), trousers (pl) (BrE);
    unos pantalones a pair of pants o trousers;
    pantalones cortos shorts (pl);
    pantalones de peto overalls (pl) (AmE), dungarees (pl) (BrE);
    pantalones tejanos or vaqueros jeans (pl)

    ' pantalones' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    bajarse
    - destrozada
    - destrozado
    - estrecha
    - estrecho
    - pantalón
    - pegar
    - peto
    - remangar
    - remangarse
    - remendar
    - servir
    - subirse
    - acampanado
    - bajar
    - caber
    - estrechar
    - planchar
    - romper
    - subir
    - sujetar
    - tirante
    - viejo
    - vuelta
    English:
    adjust
    - back
    - bell-bottoms
    - breeches
    - cord
    - corduroy
    - crease
    - cuff
    - drawstring trousers
    - flare
    - go out
    - go together
    - jodhpurs
    - leg
    - pair
    - pants
    - riding breeches
    - shorts
    - ski pants
    - take down
    - tight
    - trousers
    - bottom
    - knickerbockers
    - overall
    - press
    - short
    - slacks
    - tuck
    * * *
    m, pantalones mpl pants pl, Br
    trousers pl ;
    trousers fam

    Spanish-English dictionary > pantalones

  • 11 imprimir

    v.
    1 to print (libro, documento).
    María imprimió su huella Mary imprinted her mark.
    María imprimió los volantes Mary printed the fliers.
    2 to impress.
    3 to impart, to transmit.
    * * *
    (pp imprimido,-a o impreso,-a)
    1 (gen) to print
    2 (dejar huella) to stamp
    4 (dar) to give
    \
    imprimir estilo to leave one's mark
    imprimir un ritmo to set the pace
    máquina de imprimir printing machine
    * * *
    verb
    * * *
    (pp (como ADJ) impreso) VT
    1) (Tip) [+ libro, folleto, billetes] to print

    "impreso en Montevideo" — "printed in Montevideo"

    2) (Inform) [+ documento, página] to print out
    3) (=marcar) [+ nombre, número] to print
    4) (=transmitir) [+ estilo] to stamp; [+ ritmo] to set; [+ velocidad] to introduce
    5) (Bio) to imprint (a on)
    * * *
    verbo transitivo
    1)
    a) (Impr) to print
    b) < huella>
    2) (comunicar, dar) (frml) to give

    experiencias que imprimen carácter — character-forming o character-building experiences

    * * *
    = print, print out, run off, impress, pull, come off + the press.
    Ex. Accessions lists contain information about the documents received since the last time the list was printed.
    Ex. Like the stop-list, the go-list can also be displayed or printed out for consideration prior to updating or other modification.
    Ex. Not only are they the same work, they were run off from the same plates.
    Ex. A typical opening of the book shows two pages of text with the unfamiliar long 'f' often heavily impressed into a rough-looking paper.
    Ex. Until the later seventeenth century a special form of piecework payment was common in French and English houses, whereby journeymen contracted with the master to set so many pages or pull so many sheets in a day.
    Ex. The number of copies of an edition which have come off the press at any one time is known as the size of the edition.
    ----
    * empezar a imprimir = go to + press.
    * encargado de la máquina de imprimir = machine-minder.
    * imprimir en letra realzada = print in + double density.
    * joven ayudante del encargado de la máquina de imprimir = machine boy.
    * letra rota o a medio imprimir = broken letter.
    * máquina de imprimir direcciones = addressograph, addressing machine.
    * que se puede imprimir = printable.
    * reimprimir = reprint.
    * volver a imprimir = reprint.
    * * *
    verbo transitivo
    1)
    a) (Impr) to print
    b) < huella>
    2) (comunicar, dar) (frml) to give

    experiencias que imprimen carácter — character-forming o character-building experiences

    * * *
    = print, print out, run off, impress, pull, come off + the press.

    Ex: Accessions lists contain information about the documents received since the last time the list was printed.

    Ex: Like the stop-list, the go-list can also be displayed or printed out for consideration prior to updating or other modification.
    Ex: Not only are they the same work, they were run off from the same plates.
    Ex: A typical opening of the book shows two pages of text with the unfamiliar long 'f' often heavily impressed into a rough-looking paper.
    Ex: Until the later seventeenth century a special form of piecework payment was common in French and English houses, whereby journeymen contracted with the master to set so many pages or pull so many sheets in a day.
    Ex: The number of copies of an edition which have come off the press at any one time is known as the size of the edition.
    * empezar a imprimir = go to + press.
    * encargado de la máquina de imprimir = machine-minder.
    * imprimir en letra realzada = print in + double density.
    * joven ayudante del encargado de la máquina de imprimir = machine boy.
    * letra rota o a medio imprimir = broken letter.
    * máquina de imprimir direcciones = addressograph, addressing machine.
    * que se puede imprimir = printable.
    * reimprimir = reprint.
    * volver a imprimir = reprint.

    * * *
    vt
    A
    1 ( Impr) to print
    impreso en Perú printed in Peru
    2 ‹huella/marca›
    dejó sus huellas impresas en el barro he left his footprints in the mud
    B (comunicar, dar)
    1 ( frml); ‹movimiento› to impart ( frml), to transmit ( frml)
    imprimió excesiva velocidad al vehículo he drove the vehicle at excessive speed
    imprimió un trotecito corto a la yegua he brought the mare to a brisk trot
    imprimió a sus caderas un leve balanceo she swung her hips slightly as she walked
    2 ( frml); ‹orientación› to give
    esas experiencias imprimen carácter those are character-forming o character-building experiences
    le imprimió su estilo propio al personaje he stamped his own style on the character, he stamped the character with his own style
    * * *

     

    imprimir ( conjugate imprimir) verbo transitivo (Impr) to print;

    imprimir verbo transitivo
    1 Impr Inform to print
    2 (dejar una huella) to stamp, impress: imprime su estilo a todo lo que hace, he stamps his mark on everything he does
    3 (comunicar, transmitir) to give: le imprimió mucha velocidad a la pelota, he makes the ball go very fast
    le imprimió un efecto extraño a la pelota, he put spin on the ball

    ' imprimir' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    blanca
    - blanco
    - estampar
    - impreso
    English:
    impress
    - italicize
    - output
    - print
    - print out
    - imprint
    - press
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [libro, documento] to print;
    imprimir algo a todo color to print sth in full colour;
    impreso en México printed in Mexico
    2. [huella, paso] to leave, to make;
    imprimió sus pisadas en la alfombra she left footprints on the carpet
    3. [dar] [movimiento]
    imprimir velocidad a algo to speed sth up;
    el atleta mexicano imprimió un ritmo endiablado a la carrera the Mexican athlete set a fiendish pace in the race
    4. [dar] [carácter]
    imprimió a su novela un carácter revolucionario she imbued her work with a revolutionary spirit;
    imprimió a su gobierno un toque progresista he brought a progressive touch to his government;
    imprimieron al acuerdo un carácter conciliador they made the agreement conciliatory in tone;
    sus dibujos imprimen carácter al libro her illustrations lend character to the book;
    su voz imprime un sello propio al grupo his voice gives the group its own distinctive quality
    ♦ vi
    to print
    * * *
    <part impreso> v/t tb
    INFOR print; fig
    transmit
    * * *
    imprimir {42} vt
    1) : to print
    2) : to imprint, to stamp, to impress
    * * *
    imprimir vb to print

    Spanish-English dictionary > imprimir

  • 12 κύριος

    1
    I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.
    2
    II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.
    ① one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).
    ⓐ of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.
    ⓑ w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.
    ② one who is in a position of authority, lord, master
    ⓐ of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.
    ⓑ of transcendent beings
    α. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).
    β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.
    γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:
    א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.
    ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).
    ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.
    δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.
    ε. of other transcendent beings
    א. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.
    ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κύριος

  • 13 ἔχω

    ἔχω (Hom.+) impf. εἶχον, 1 pl. εἴχαμεν and 3 pl. εἶχαν (both as vv.ll.; Mlt-H. 194; B-D-F §82) Mk 8:7; Rv 9:8 or εἴχοσαν (B-D-F §84, 2; Mlt-H. 194; Kühner-Bl. II p. 55) J 15:22, 24; 2 aor. ἔσχον; mixed aor. forms include ἔσχαν Hv 3, 5, 1, ἔσχοσαν 1 Esdr 6:5; 1 Macc 10:15 (ἔσχον, εἴχον vv.ll.); pf. ἔσχηκα; plpf. ἐσχήκειν.—In the following divisions: act. trans. 1–9; act. intr. 10; mid. 11.
    ① to possess or contain, have, own (Hom.+)
    ⓐ to possess someth. that is under one’s control
    α. own, possess (s. esp. TestJob 9f) κτήματα πολλά own much property Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. πρόβατα Lk 15:4; J 10:16. θησαυρόν Mt 19:21; Mk 10:21b. βίον living Lk 21:4; 1J 3:17. δραχμὰς δέκα Lk 15:8. πλοῖα Rv 18:19. κληρονομίαν Eph 5:5. θυσιαστήριον Hb 13:10a; μέρος ἔ. ἔν τινι have a share in someth. Rv 20:6. Gener. μηδὲν ἔ. own nothing (SibOr 3, 244) 2 Cor 6:10. ὅσα ἔχεις Mk 10:21; cp. 12:44; Mt 13:44, 46; 18:25. τί ἔχεις ὸ̔ οὐκ ἔλαβες; what do you have that you have not been given? 1 Cor 4:7. The obj. acc. is often used w. an adj. or ptc.: ἔ. ἅπαντα κοινά have everything in common Ac 2:44 (cp. Jos., Ant. 15, 18). ἔ. πολλὰ ἀγαθὰ κείμενα have many good things stored up Lk 12:19.—Hb 12:1. Abs. ἔ. have (anything) (Soph.et al.; Sir 13:5; 14:11) Mt 13:12a; Mk 4:25a; Lk 8:18a. ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν in accordance w. what you have 2 Cor 8:11. ἔ. εἰς ἀπαρτισμόν have (enough) to complete Lk 14:28. W. neg. ἔ. have nothing Mt 13:12b; Mk 4:25b; Lk 8:18b.—ὁ ἔχων the one who has, who is well off (Soph., Aj. 157; Eur., Alc. 57; X., An. 7, 3, 28; Ar. 15:7). πᾶς ὁ ἔχων everyone who has (anything) Mt 25:29a; Lk 19:26a. ὁ μὴ ἔχων the one who has nothing (X., An. 7, 3, 28; 1 Esdr 9:51, 54; 2 Esdr 18:10) Mt 25:29b; Lk 19:26b; 1 Cor 11:22.
    β. have = hold in one’s charge or keeping ἔ. τὰς κλεῖς hold the keys Rv 1:18; cp. 3:7. τὸ γλωσσόκομον the money-box J 12:6; 13:29.
    ⓑ to contain someth. have, possess, of the whole in relation to its parts
    α. of living beings, of parts of the body in men and animals μέλη Ro 12:4a; cp. 1 Cor 12:12. σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα Lk 24:39 (Just., A I, 66, 2 καὶ σάρκα καὶ αἷμα) ἀκροβυστίαν Ac 11:3. οὖς Rv 2:7, 11. ὦτα Mt 11:15; Mk 7:16; Lk 8:8. χεῖρας, πόδας, ὀφθαλμούς Mt 18:8f; Mk 9:43, 45, 47. Of animals and animal-like beings ἔ. πρόσωπον Rv 4:7. πτέρυγας vs. 8. κέρατα 5:6. ψυχάς 8:9. τρίχας 9:8. κεφαλάς 12:3 (TestAbr B 14 p. 118, 19 [Stone p. 84]) al. ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32 (Just., D. 48, 3 σάρκα ἔχων). Of plants (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62] εὗρον δένδρον … ἔχον κλάδους) ῥίζαν ἔ. Mt 13:6; Mk 4:6.
    β. of inanimate things: of cities τ. θεμελίους ἔ. Hb 11:10; cp. Rv 21:14. Of a head-covering χαρακτῆρα ἔχει βασιλικόν has a royal emblem GJs 2:2.
    ⓒ to have at hand, have at one’s disposal have ἄρτους Mt 14:17; cp. 15:34; J 21:5, where the sense is prob. ‘Did you catch any fish for breakfast?’. οὐκ ἔχω ὸ̔ παραθήσω αὐτῷ I have nothing to set before him Lk 11:6. μὴ ἐχόντων τί φάγωσι since they had nothing to eat Mk 8:1; cp. Mt 15:32 (Soph., Oed. Col. 316 οὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ). οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω I have no place to store Lk 12:17. ἄντλημα a bucket J 4:11a. οἰκίας ἔ. have houses (at one’s disposal) 1 Cor 11:22. Of pers.: have (at one’s disposal) (PAmh 92, 18 οὐχ ἕξω κοινωνόν and oft. in pap) Moses and the prophets Lk 16:29. παράκλητον an advocate, a helper 1J 2:1. οὐδένα ἔ. ἰσόψυχον Phil 2:20. ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἔ. J 5:7.
    ⓓ to have within oneself have σύλλημα ἔχει ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου she has something conceived through the Holy Spirit GJs 18:1. Var. constr. w. ἐν: of women ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. be pregnant (γαστήρ 2) Mt 1:18, 23 (Is 7:14); 24:19; Mk 13:17; Lk 21:23; 1 Th 5:3; Rv 12:2. ἔ. τινὰ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ have someone in one’s heart Phil 1:7 (Ovid, Metam. 2, 641 aliquem clausum pectore habere). ἔ. τι ἐν ἑαυτῷ (Jos., Ant. 8, 171; cp. TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 14 [Stone p. 8] ἔκρυψεν τὸ μυστήριον, μόνος ἔχων ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ): ζωήν J 5:26. τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1J 5:10; τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου have a sentence of death within oneself 2 Cor 1:9.
    ⓔ to have with oneself or in one’s company have μεθʼ ἑαυτοῦ (X., Cyr. 1, 4, 17) τινά someone Mt 15:30; 26:11; Mk 2:19; 14:7; J 12:8; AcPl Ha 8, 35; σὺν αὐτῷ 4:18.—The ptc. w. acc. = with (Diod S 12, 78, 1 ἔχων δύναμιν with a [military] force; 18, 61, 1 ὁ θρόνος ἔχων τὸ διάδημα the throne with the diadem; JosAs 27:8 ἔχοντες ἐσπασμένας τὰς ῥομφαίας ‘with their swords drawn’) ἀνέβησαν ἔχοντες αὐτόν they went up with him Lk 2:42 D.
    ② to stand in a close relationship to someone, have, have as
    ⓐ of relatives πατέρα ἔ. J 8:41. ἀδελφούς Lk 16:28. ἄνδρα (Aristot., Cat. 15b, 27f λεγόμεθα δὲ καὶ γυναῖκα ἔχειν καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἄνδρα; Tob 3:8 BA) be married (of the woman) J 4:17f; 1 Cor 7:2b, 13; Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). γυναῖκα of the man (cp. Lucian, Tox. 45; SIG 1160 γυναικὸς Αἴ., τῆς νῦν ἔχει; PGM 13, 320; 1 Esdr 9:12, 18; Just., D. 141, 4 πολλὰς ἔσχον γυναίκας. As early as Od. 11, 603 Heracles ἔχει Ἥβην) 1 Cor 7:2a, 12, 29 (for the wordplay cp. Heliod. 1, 18, 4 in connection w. the handing over of a virgin: σὺ ἔχων οὐκ ἕξεις; Crates, 7th Ep. [p. 58, 8 Malherbe] πάντʼ ἔχοντες οὐδὲν ἔχετε). τέκνα Mt 21:28; 22:24; 1 Ti 3:4; 5:4; Tit 1:6. υἱούς (Artem. 5, 42 τὶς τρεῖς ἔχων υἱούς; cp. θυγατέρα TestAbr B 10 p. 114, 17 [Stone p.76]) Lk 15:11; Gal 4:22. σπέρμα have children Mt 22:25. W. acc. as obj. and in predicate (Ar. 8, 4 τούτους συνηγόρους ἔχοντες τῆς κακίας; 11, 3 ἔσχε μοιχὸν τὸν Ἄρην; Ath. 7, 2 ἔχομεν προφήτας μάρτυρας) ἔ. τινὰ πατέρα have someone as father Mt 3:9. ἔ. τινὰ γυναῖκα (w. γυναῖκα to be understood fr. the context) 14:4; cp. Mk 6:18; ὥστε γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔ. that someone has taken his father’s wife (as his own wife: the simple ἔχειν in this sense as Plut., Cato Min. 21, 3; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 10 §34; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 147. Perh. an illicit relationship is meant, as Longus 4, 17; Hesychius Miles. [VI A.D.], Viri Ill. 4 JFlach [1880] ἔχω Λαί̈δα) 1 Cor 5:1 (Diod S 20, 33, 5 of a man who had illicit relations with his stepmother: ἔχειν λάθρᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς τὴν Ἀλκίαν).
    ⓑ more gener. φίλον have a friend Lk 11:5. ἀσθενοῦντας have sick people Lk 4:40 and χήρας widows 1 Ti 5:16 to care for; παιδαγωγοὺς ἔ. 1 Cor 4:15. δοῦλον Lk 17:7. οἰκονόμον 16:1; κύριον ἔ. have a master, i.e. be under a master’s control Col 4:1; δεσπότην ἔ. 1 Ti 6:2; βασιλέα J 19:15. ἀρχιερέα Hb 4:14; 8:1. ποιμένα Mt 9:36. ἔχων ὑπʼ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας I have soldiers under me Lk 7:8. W. direct obj. and predicate acc. ἔ. τινὰ ὑπηρέτην have someone as an assistant Ac 13:5 (Just., A I, 14, 1) ἔ. τινὰ τύπον have someone as an example Phil 3:17.—Of the relation of Christians to God and to Jesus ἔ. θεόν, τὸν πατέρα, τὸν υἱόν have God, the Father, the Son, i.e. be in communion w. them 1J 2:23; 2J 9; AcPl Ha 4, 7.—HHanse, at end of this entry.
    ③ to take a hold on someth., have, hold (to), grip
    ⓐ of holding someth. in one’s hand ἔ. τι ἐν τῇ χειρί have someth. in one’s hand (since Il. 18, 505) Rv 1:16; 6:5; 10:2; 17:4. Of holding in the hand without ἐν τῇ χειρί (Josh 6:8; JosAs 5:7) ἔ. κιθάραν 5:8. λιβανωτὸν χρυσοῦν 8:3, cp. vs. 6; 14:17 and s. ἀλάβαστρον Mt 26:7 and Mk 14:3.
    ⓑ of keeping someth. safe, a mina (a laborer’s wages for about three months) in a handkerchief keep safe Lk 19:20.
    ⓒ of holding fast to matters of transcendent importance, fig. τὴν μαρτυρίαν Rv 6:9; 12:17; 19:10; the secret of Christian piety 1 Ti 3:9; an example of sound teaching 2 Ti 1:13; keep (Diod S 17, 93, 1 τὴν βασιλείαν ἔχειν=keep control) Mk 6:18.
    ⓓ of states of being hold, hold in its grip, seize (Hom. et al.; PGiss 65a, 4 παρακαλῶ σε κύριέ μου, εἰδότα τὴν ἔχουσάν με συμφορὰν ἀπολῦσαί μοι; Job 21:6; Is 13:8; Jos., Ant. 3, 95 δέος εἶχε τοὺς Ἑβρ.; 5, 63; Just., D. 19, 3) εἶχεν αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ ἔκστασις trembling and amazement had seized them Mk 16:8.
    ④ to carry/bear as accessory or part of a whole, have on, wear, of clothing, weapons, etc. (Hom. et al.; LXX; TestAbr B p. 114, 22 [Stone p. 76]) τὸ ἔνδυμα Mt 3:4; 22:12 (cp. ἔνδυσιν TestJob 25:7). κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων w. τὶ to be supplied while he wears (a covering) on his head 1 Cor 11:4. ἔ. θώρακας Rv 9:9, 17. ἔ. μάχαιραν wear a sword (Jos., Ant. 6, 190) J 18:10. Sim. of trees ἔ. φύλλα have leaves Mk 11:13 (ApcSed. 8:8).
    ⑤ be in a position to do someth., can, be able, ἔ. w. inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; cp. Eur., Hec. 761; Hdt. 1, 49; Pla., Phd. p. 76d; Demosth., Ep. 2, 22; Theocr. 10, 37 τὸν τρόπον οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν=I cannot specify the manner; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 21, 2, Hermot. 55; Epict. 1, 9, 32; 2, 2, 24 al.; Ael. Aristid. 51, 50 K.=27 p. 546 D.: οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν; PPetr II, 12, 1, 16; PAmh 131, 15; Pr 3:27; ApcEsdr 2:24; 3:7; 6:5; TestAbr A 8, p. 86, 13 [Stone p. 20]; Jos., Ant. 1, 338; 2, 58; Just., A I, 19, 5, D. 4, 6 οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν) ἔ. ἀποδοῦναι be able to pay Mt 18:25a; Lk 7:42; 14:14. μὴ ἔ. περισσότερον τι ποιῆσαι be in a position to do nothing more 12:4. οὐδὲν ἔ. ἀντειπεῖν be able to make a reply Ac 4:14; cp. Tit 2:8. ἔ. κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ J 8:6 (cp. 9a below, end). ἀσφαλές τι γράψαι οὐκ ἔχω I have nothing definite to write Ac 25:26a; cp. 26b. ἔ. μεταδιδόναι Eph 4:28a. ἔ. τὴν τούτων μνήμην ποιεῖσθαι be able to recall these things to mind 2 Pt 1:15. κατʼ οὐδενὸς εἶχεν μείζονος ὀμόσαι he could swear by no one greater Hb 6:13. In the same sense without the actual addition of the inf., which is automatically supplied fr. context (X., An. 2, 1, 9) ὸ̔ ἔσχεν (i.e. ποιῆσαι) ἐποίησεν she has done what she could Mk 14:8.
    ⑥ to have an opinion about someth., consider, look upon, view w. acc. as obj. and predicate acc. (POxy 292, 6 [c. 25 A.D.] ἔχειν αὐτὸν συνεσταμένον=look upon him as recommended; 787 [16 A.D.]; PGiss 71, 4; Job 30:9; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 19; Ath. 32, 3 τοὺς μὲν υἱοὺς … νοοῦμεν, τοὺς δὲ ἀδελφούς ἔχομεν) ἔχε με παρῃτημένον consider me excused (= don’t expect me to come) Lk 14:18b, 19 (cp. Martial 2, 79 excusatum habeas me). τινὰ ἔντιμον ἔ. hold someone in honor Phil 2:29. ἔ. τινὰ ὡς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 14:5; 21:26, 46 v.l. (cp. GNicod 5 [=Acta Pilati B 5 p. 297 Tdf.] ἔχειν [Jannes and Jambres] ὡς θεούς; Just., D. 47, 5 τὸν μετανοοῦντα … ὡς δίκαιον καὶ ἀναμάρτητον ἔχει). ἔ. τινὰ εἰς προφήτην consider someone a prophet Mt 21:46 (cp. Duris [III B.C.]: 76 Fgm. 21 Jac. ὸ̔ν εἰς θεοὺς ἔχουσιν). εἶχον τ. Ἰωάννην ὄντως ὅτι προφήτης ἦν they thought that John was really a prophet Mk 11:32.
    ⑦ to experience someth., have (freq. in auxiliary capacity CTurner, JTS 28, 1927, 357–60)
    ⓐ of all conditions of body and soul (Hom. et al.; LXX)
    α. of illness, et al. (ApcMos 6 νόσον καὶ πόνον ἔχω; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 305) ἀσθενείας have sicknesses/diseases Ac 28:9. μάστιγας physical troubles Mk 3:10. πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης Rv 13:14. θλῖψιν J 16:33b; 1 Cor 7:28; Rv 2:10. Esp. of possession by hostile spirits: δαιμόνιον ἔ. be possessed by an evil spirit Mt 11:18; Lk 7:33; 8:27; J 7:20; 8:48f, 52; 10:20. Βεελζεβούλ Mk 3:22. πνεῦμα ἀκάθαρτον vs. 30; 7:25; Ac 8:7. πνεῦμα δαιμονίου ἀκαθάρτου Lk 4:33. πνεῦμα πονηρόν Ac 19:13. πνεῦμα ἄλαλον Mk 9:17. πνεῦμα ἀσθενείας spirit of sickness Lk 13:11. τὸν λεγιῶνα (the evil spirit called) Legion Mk 5:15.
    β. gener. of conditions, characteristics, capabilities, emotions, inner possession: ἀγάπην ἔ. have love (cp. Diod S 3, 58, 3 φιλίαν ἔχειν; Just., D. 93, 4 φιλίαν ἢ ἀγάπην ἔχοντε) J 5:42; 13:35; 15:13; 1J 4:16; 1 Cor 13:1ff; 2 Cor 2:4; Phil 2:2; 1 Pt 4:8. ἀγνωσίαν θεοῦ fail to know God 1 Cor 15:34. ἁμαρτίαν J 9:41; 15:22a. ἀσθένειαν Hb 7:28. γνῶσιν 1 Cor 8:1, 10 (Just., A II, 13, 1; D. 28, 4). ἐλπίδα Ac 24:15; Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12; 10:15; Eph 2:12; 1J 3:3 (Ath. 33, 1). ἐπιθυμίαν Phil 1:23. ἐπιποθίαν Ro 15:23b; ζῆλον ἔ. have zeal Ro 10:2. Have jealousy Js 3:14. θυμόν Rv 12:12. λύπην (ApcMos 3 p. 2, 16 Tdf.) J 16:21f; 2 Cor 2:3; Phil 2:27; μνείαν τινὸς ἔ. remember someone 1 Th 3:6. παρρησίαν Phlm 8; Hb 10:19; 1J 2:28; 3:21; 4:17; 5:14. πεποίθησιν 2 Cor 3:4; Phil 3:4. πίστιν Mt 17:20; 21:21; Mk 4:40; Ac 14:9; Ro 14:22; 1 Cor 13:2; 1 Ti 1:19 al. (Just., A I, 52, 1). προφητείαν have the gift of prophecy 1 Cor 13:2. σοφίαν (X., Mem. 2, 3, 10) Rv 17:9. συνείδησιν ἁμαρτιῶν Hb 10:2. καλὴν συνείδησιν 13:18; ἀγαθὴν ς. 1 Ti 1:19; 1 Pt 3:16; ἀπρόσκοπον ς. Ac 24:16; ὑπομονήν Rv 2:3. φόβον 1 Ti 5:20. χαράν Phlm 7. χάριν ἔ. τινί be grateful to someone Lk 17:9; 1 Ti 1:12; 2 Ti 1:3; σιγὴν ἔ. be silent Hs 9, 11, 5. ἀνάγκην ἔσχον I felt it necessary Jd 3 (HKoskenniemi, Studien zur Idee und Phraseologie des Griechischen Briefes bis 400 n. Chr. ’56, 78–87).
    γ. of advantages, benefits, or comforts that one enjoys: ἔ. τὰ αἰτήματα to have been granted the requests 1J 5:15; ἀνάπαυσιν ἔ. have rest Rv 4:8; 14:11; ἀπόλαυσιν τινος ἔ. enjoy someth. Hb 11:25. βάθος γῆς Mt 13:5b; Mk 4:5b; γῆν πολλήν Mt 13:5a; Mk 4:5a. τὴν προσέλευσιν τὴν πρὸς τὸν κύριον AcPl Ha 8, 22f; εἰρήνην Ro 5:1. ἐλευθερίαν Gal 2:4. S. ἐξουσία, ἐπαγγελία, ἔπαινος, ζωή, ἰκμάς, καιρός, καρπός, καύχημα, καύχησις, λόγος, μισθός, νοῦς, πνεῦμα, προσαγωγή, πρόφασις, τιμή, χάρις (=favor), χάρισμα.
    δ. of a sense of obligation in regard to someth.—W. dir. object have = have someth. over one, be under someth.: ἀνάγκην ἔχειν be under necessity 1 Cor 7:37a; w. inf. foll. have a need (ἀνάγκη 1) Lk 14:18; 23:16 v.l.; Hb 7:27; χρείαν ἔ. be in need abs. Eph 4:28b; τινός need someth. (Aeschyl. et al.; SIG 333, 20; 421, 35 al.; PPetr III, 42 G 9, 7 [III B.C.] ἐάν τινος χρείαν ἔχῃς; Ath. 13, 2 ποίας ἔτι χρείαν ἑκατόμβης ἔχει;) Mt 6:8; 9:12a; Mk 11:3; Lk 19:31, 34; J 13:29; 1 Cor 12:21; Hb 10:36 al.; w. inf. foll. (TestSol 13:2) Mt 3:14; 14:16; J 13:10; 1 Th 1:8; 4:9; 5:1. νόμον J 19:7. ἐπιταγήν 1 Cor 7:25. ἐντολήν (SIG 559, 9 ἔ. τὰς ἰντολάς; 1 Esdr 4:52; 2 Macc 3:13; Jos., Bell. 1, 261) Hb 7:5; 1J 2:7; 4:21; 2J 5; cp. J 14:21. διακονίαν 2 Cor 4:1. ἀγῶνα Phil 1:30; Col 2:1. πρᾶξιν Ro 12:4b. ἔγκλημα Ac 23:29. κόλασιν ApcPt Bodl. (ApcEsdr 1:22 p. 25, 17 Tdf.).
    ε. of a sense of inevitability in respect to some action.—W. inf. foll. one must (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 1, 3 καθαιρεθῆναι ἔχεις=you must be deposed; Porphyr., Against the Christians 63 Harnack [ABA 1916] παθεῖν; Gen 18:31; Jos., Ant. 19, 348 τοῦ τεθνάναι; TestSol 5:12 σίδηρα ἔχεις φορέσαι; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 22 [Stone p. 48] τοῦ βίου τοῦτου ἀπαλλάξαι εἶχες; Just., D. 51, 2 ἔργῳ πεισθήναι ὑμῶν ἐχόντων) βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι I must undergo a baptism Lk 12:50. ἔχω σοί τι εἰπεῖν I have someth. to say to you (Lucian, Philops. 1 ἔχεις μοι εἰπεῖν. Without dat. Aelian, VH 2, 23; Jos., Ant. 16, 312) 7:40. καινόν σοι θέαμα ἔχω ἐξηγήσασθαι I have a wonderful new thing to tell you=‘I must tell you about something wonderful that I’ve just seen’ GJs 19:3. ἀπαγγεῖλαι Ac 23:17, 19; cp. vs. 18. πολλὰ γράφειν 2J 12; 3J 13.
    ⓑ of temporal circumstances w. indications of time and age: πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις you are not yet fifty years old J 8:57 (cp. Jos., Ant. 1, 198). τριάκοντα κ. ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ αὐτοῦ who had been sick for 38 years 5:5 (Cyranides p. 63, 25 πολὺν χρόνον ἔχων ἐν τῇ ἀρρωστίᾳ. W. cardinal numeral TestJob 26:1 δέκα ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἔχω ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς; POxy 1862, 17 τέσσαρες μῆνας ἔχει. Mirac. S. Georgii 44, 7 [JAufhauser 1913] ἔσχεν … ἔτη ἑπτά); cp. Mt 9:20 v.l. τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἔ. ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ have lain in the grave for four days J 11:17 (Jos., Ant. 7, 1 αὐτοῦ δύο ἡμέρας ἔχοντος ἐν τῇ Σεκέλλᾳ). πολὺν χρόνον ἔ. be (somewhere or in a certain condition) for a long time 5:6. ἡλικίαν ἔχειν be of age (Pla., Euthyd. 32, 306d; Plut., Mor. 547a; BGU 168 τοῖς ἀτελέσι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡλικίαν) 9:21, 23. τέλος ἔχειν have an end, be at an end (Lucian, Charon 17; UPZ 81 III, 20 [II A.D.] τέλος ἔχει πάντα; Ar. 4:2 ἀρχὴν καὶ τέλος) Mk 3:26; Lk 22:37 (on the latter pass. s. τέλος 2); cp. Hb 7:3.
    ⑧ as connective marker, to have or include in itself, bring about, cause w. acc. (Hom. et al.; Wsd 8:16) of ὑπομονή: ἔργον τέλειον Js 1:4. Of πίστις: ἔργα 2:17. Of φόβος: κόλασιν 1J 4:18. Of παρρησία: μεγάλην μισθαποδοσίαν Hb 10:35. Of πολυτέλεια: λύπην, χαράν Hs 1, 10. ἐσχάτην εὐλογίαν, ἥτις διαδοχὴν οὐκ ἔχει ultimate blessing, which has no successor GJs 6:2.
    ⑨ special combinations
    ⓐ w. prep. ἐν: τὸν θεὸν ἔ. ἐν ἐπιγνώσει acknowledge God Ro 1:28 (cp. ἐν ὀργῇ ἔ. τινά=‘be angry at someone’, Thu. 2, 18, 5; 2, 21, 3; ἐν ὀρρωδίᾳ ἔ. τ. 2, 89, 1; ἐν ἡδονῇ ἔ. τ.=‘be glad to see someone’ 3, 9, 1; ἐν εὐνοίᾳ ἔ. Demosth. 18, 167). ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (ἕτοιμος b). ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν he has no hold on me J 14:30 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 32 §125 ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι=have someth. [hope of safety] in someone). κατά τινος: on 1 Cor 11:4 s. above 4. ἔ. τι κατά τινος have someth. against someone Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:14. ἔ. κατά τινος w. sim. mng. Hm 2:2; Hs 9, 23, 2; w. ὅτι foll. Rv 2:4, 20. ἔ. τινὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον meet someone face to face Ac 25:16. μετά: ἔ. τι μετά τινος have someth. w. someone κρίματα lawsuits 1 Cor 6:7. περί: ἔ. περί τινος have (a word, a reference, an explanation) about someth. B 12:1; with adv. τελείως 10:10. πρός τινα have someth. against someone (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21 ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον) Ac 24:19. ζητήματα ἔ. πρός τινα have differences w. someone (on points in question) 25:19. λόγον ἔ. πρός τινα 19:38. πρᾶγμα (=Lat. causa, ‘lawsuit’: BGU 19 I, 5; 361 II, 4) ἔ. πρός τινα (POxy 743, 19 [2 B.C.] εἰ πρὸς ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα; BGU 22:8) 1 Cor 6:1. ἵνα ἔχωσιν κατηγορίαν αὐτοῦ J 8:4 D (cp. 5 above). πρός τινα ἔ. μομφήν have a complaint against someone Col 3:13.
    ⓑ τοῦτο ἔχεις ὅτι you have this (in your favor), that Rv 2:6. ἔ. ὁδόν be situated (a certain distance) away (cp. Peripl. Eryth. 37: Ὡραία ἔχουσα ὁδὸν ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ θαλάσσης) of the Mt. of Olives ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς Ἰερουσαλὴμ σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν Ac 1:12.—ἴδε ἔχεις τὸ σόν here you have what is yours Mt 25:25. ἔχετε κουστωδίαν there you have a guard (=you can have a guard) 27:65 (cp. POxy 33 III, 4).
    ⑩ to be in some state or condition, act. intr. (spatially: Ath. 25, 1 οἱ ἄγγελοι … περὶ τόν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν) w. adv. (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ impers. it is, the situation is (Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 10 πῶς ὑμῖν ἔχειν ταῦτα δοκεῖ; =how does this situation seem to you? Just., D. 3, 5 τὸ … ὡσαύτως ἀεὶ ἔχων) ἄλλως 1 Ti 5:25. οὕτως (Antig. Car. 20; Cebes 4, 1; POxy 294, 11 [22 A.D.] εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; TestSol 20:8; Jos., Ant. 15, 261; Just., D. 3:5 οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει) Ac 7:1; 12:15; 17:11; 24:9. τὸ καλῶς ἔχον what is right 1 Cl 14:2 (Michel 543, 12 [c. 200 B.C.] καλῶς ἔχον ἐστὶ τιμᾶσθαι τοὺς εὔνους ἄνδρας). τὸ νῦν ἔχον for the present Ac 24:25 (cp. Plut., Mor. 749a; Lucian, Anachars. 40, Catapl. 13 τὸ δὲ νῦν ἔχον μὴ διάτριβε; Tob 7:11).
    ⓑ pers. be (in a certain way) πῶς ἔχουσιν how they are Ac 15:36 (cp. Gen 43:27; Jos., Ant. 4, 112). ἑτοίμως ἔ. be ready, hold oneself in readiness w. inf. foll. (BGU 80, 17 [II A.D.] ἡ Σωτηρία ἑτοίμως ἔχουσα καταγράψαι; Da 3:15 LXX; Jos., Ant. 13, 6; Just., D. 50, 1) 21:13; 2 Cor 12:14; 1 Pt 4:5. Also ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔ. 2 Cor 10:6 (s. ἕτοιμος b end). εὖ ἔ. be well-disposed πρός τινα toward someone Hs 9, 10, 7 (cp. Demosth. 9, 63 ἥδιον ἔχειν πρός τινα; SIG 1094, 4 φιλανθρώπως ἔχει πρὸς πάντας). κακῶς ἔ. be sick (Aristoph. et al.; POxy 935, 15; Ezk 34:4) Mt 4:24; 8:16; 9:12b; 17:15 v.l. (see πάσχω 2). καλῶς ἔ. be well, healthy (Epict. 1, 11, 4; PGen 54, 8; PFlor 230, 24) Mk 16:18; ἐσχάτως ἔ. (s. ἐσχάτως) 5:23; κομψότερον ἔ. feel better (κομψῶς ἔ.: Epict. 2, 18, 14; 3, 10, 13; PParis 18; PTebt 414, 10 ἐὰν κομψῶς σχῶ) J 4:52.
    ⑪ to be closely associated, in a variety of renderings, hold fast, be next to, be next, mid. (Hom. et al.) in NT only ptc.
    ⓐ of proper situation or placement, esp. of inner belonging hold fast, cling to. The ‘to’ of belonging and the ‘with’ of association are expressed by the gen. (Theognis 1, 32 ἀεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο=ever hold fast to the good people; X., Oec. 6, 1; Pla., Leg. 7, 811d; Lucian, Hermot. 69 ἐλπίδος οὐ μικρᾶς ἐχόμενα λέγεις; Sallust. 14 p. 26, 24 τ. θεῶν; Philo, Agr. 101 τὰ ἀρετῆς ἐχόμενα; Jos., Ant. 10, 204 οὐδὲν ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας ἐχόμενον, C. Ap. 1, 83 παλαιᾶς ἱστορίας ἐχόμενον; Just., A I, 68, 1 λόγου καὶ ἀληθείας ἔχεσθαι; Tat. 33, 1 μανίας ἔχεται πολλῆς; Ath., R. 48, 3 λόγῳ … ἀληθείας ἐχομένῳ) τὰ ἐχόμενα σωτηρίας things that belong to salvation Hb 6:9.
    ⓑ of proximity
    α. spatial, to be next to someth: ἐχόμενος neighboring (Isocr. 4, 96 νῆσος; Hdt. 1, 134 al. οἱ ἐχόμενοι=‘the neighbors’; Diod S 5, 15, 1; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 71 §294; Arrian, Peripl. 7, 2; PParis 51, 5 and oft. in pap; 1 Esdr 4:42; Jos., Ant. 6, 6 πρὸς τὰς ἐχομένας πόλεις; 11, 340) κωμοπόλεις Mk 1:38.
    β. temporal, to be next, immediately following (Thu. 6, 3, 2 τ. ἐχομένου ἔτους al.; SIG 800, 15; PRev 34, 20; PAmh 49, 4; PTebt 124, 43; LXX) τῇ ἐχομένῃ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ, as Polyb. 3, 112, 1; 5, 13, 9; 2 Macc 12:39; Jos., Ant. 6, 235; 7, 18 al.; cp. εἰς τὴν ἐχομένην [i.e. ἡμέραν] PMich 173, 16 [III B.C.]) on the next day Lk 13:33 (v.l. ἐρχομένῃ); Ac 20:15; w. ἡμέρᾳ added (PAmh 50, 17) 21:26. τῷ ἐχομένῳ σαββάτῳ 13:44 v.l. (for ἐρχομένῳ; cp. 1 Macc 4:28, where the witnesses are similarly divided).—On the whole word HHanse, ‘Gott Haben’ in d. Antike u. im frühen Christentum ’39.—B. 641; 740. EDNT. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἔχω

  • 14 קני

    קני, קָנָה(b. h.) ( to estabIish, 1) (cmp. קום, Gen. 23:17) to create; to acquire, own; to take possession. R. Hash. 31a (ref. to Ps. 24 recited in the Temple on the first day of the week) על שם שק׳ והקנהוכ׳ because he (the Lord in establishing the world) took possession and gave (his creatures) possession (invested them with a fief), and became the sovereign of the world. Kidd.I, 1 האשה קוֹנָה את עצמהוכ׳ a wife acquires herself (becomes independent) when she receives her divorce Ib. 20a כל הקוֹנֶה … כקונהוכ׳ whoever buys a Hebrew bondman creates, as it were, a master over himself. B. Mets.75b הקונה אדון לעצמו he who creates a master over himself, expl. תולה נכסיו בנכרי who (in order to evade obligations) hangs his property on a gentile (pretends to be merely the agent of a gentile); (another explan.) הכותב נכסיווכ׳ who transfers his property to his children during his lifetime. Gitt.37b sq. (ref. to Lev. 25:45) אתם קוֹנִיםוכ׳ you may buy (as a slave) one of them, but they cannot buy one of you, nor can they buy of one another. Ib. יכול לא יִקְנוּ זה את זה למעשה ידיו you may think, they cannot buy one another for the work (as long as the serf choses to be in the masters power); ולא הם קוֹנִים … לגופו they cannot buy of one another a bodily slave (who requires formal manumission to be a freeman). B. Mets.46b bot. מכור לי באלו ק׳ if one says, sell me (a certain object) for these (coins which I hold in my hand), he has bought (the sale is valid). Ib. IV, 1 הזהב קונהוכ׳, v. זָהָב. Ib. מעות הרעות קוֹנוֹתוכ׳ the delivery of cancelled coins effects the purchase of the valid coins. Ib. 47b מעות קונות the delivery of the purchasing money gives possession (no formal possession of the purchased object (מְשִׁיכָה) being required). Kidd.22b הגבהה קונה lifting up the purchased object makes the sale binding; a. v. fr. 2) to make sure; to obligate a person by a special symbolical act (קִנְיָן); to enter into an obligation by a special symbolical form. Gitt.51a בשקָנוּ מידו when they (the court, witnesses) made him obligate himself (that his widow should receive support from his estate); בשקנו לזו ולא קנו לזו when such an obligation was entered with reference to this (his wifes case), but not with reference to that (his daughters case). B. Mets.47a במה קונין … בכליו של קונה wherewith is the bargain made sure?… By handing over one of the garments (or any object) belonging to the purchaser; דניחא ליה לקונה דליהוי מקנה קונהוכ׳ for the purchaser likes the seller to obligate himself, in order that he may be sure to give him possession; a. fr.Ib. 48b when he said to him, ערבוני יָקוּן (fr. קון = קנה) my earnest money shall serve to make the purchase sure.Part. pass. קָנוּי; f. קְנוּיָה; pl. קְנוּיִים, קְנוּיִין; קְנוּיוֹת. Kidd.16a עבד עברי גופו ק׳ והרבוכ׳ a Hebrew bondman is owned bodily (to the end of his term), and if the master allowed him a reduction of his time, his allowance is not legally binding (the slave not being able to acquire himself); ib. 28a; B. Kam. 113b. Gen. R. s. 86 (ref. to Gen. 39:1) הקנויין קונין וכלוכ׳ as a rule those who are owned make themselves owners (slaves enrich themselves by robbing their master), and all slaves cause decrease to their masters house, but in this case ‘the Lord blessed (ib. 5); Yalk. ib. 145 הקונין קונין (corr. acc.); a. fr.Tosef.Ned.IV, 6 קונם … שאני קנוי the axe of which I am possessed be forbidden (v. קוֹנָם), i. e. I swear that I have no axe; Ned.35a (Rashi שאינו ק׳ I swear that another axe is not owned by me).Y.Peah IV, 18b השעה קנויה, read: פְּנוּיָה, v. פָּנוּי. Nif. נִקְנֶה to be acquired, owned, bought. Kidd.20a (ref. to Lev. 25:14) דבר הנ׳ מיד ליד this refers to what is bought from hand to hand (movable goods). Ib. I, 1 האשה נִקְנֵיתוכ׳ a wife can be acquired in three ways. Ib. 6b אין אשה נ׳ בחליפין a wife cannot be taken possession of by symbolical delivery (חֲלִיפִין). Ib. I, 3 עבד כנעני נ׳ בכסףוכ׳ a Canaanite slave is taken possession of (is considered owned) either by delivery of the purchasing money, or by a deed, or by undisturbed possession (חֲזָקָה). Ib. 5 נכסים שיש … נִקְנִיןוכ׳ landed property is acquired by means of handing over the money, but movables cannot be acquired otherwise than by taking hold (מְשִׁיכָה). Ib. 22b תִּקָּנֶה בביאח let her be acquired (become his slave) by coition; a. fr. Hif. הִקְנָה to give possession, sell, transfer. R. Hash. l. c., v. supra. Snh.81b ולמַקְנוֹ, v. קוֹנֶה. Keth.82b אשה הִקְנוּ לווכ׳ it is heaven that gave him a wife (through his brothers death without issue); Yeb.39a. B. Mets.47a בכליו של מַקְנֶה, v. supra. Ib. 33b, a. fr. אין אדם מקנה דברוכ׳ none can give possession of (sell) what does not yet exist (future crops); a. fr.Esth. R. introd. (ref. to Deut. 28:68 sq.) למה ואין קונה …ע״י שלא הִקְנִיתֶם אלהוכ׳ why ‘no purchaser?… Because you have not transmitted ‘these words of the covenant, for there is none among you making the five books of the Law his own (v. קוֹנֶה).

    Jewish literature > קני

  • 15 קנה

    קני, קָנָה(b. h.) ( to estabIish, 1) (cmp. קום, Gen. 23:17) to create; to acquire, own; to take possession. R. Hash. 31a (ref. to Ps. 24 recited in the Temple on the first day of the week) על שם שק׳ והקנהוכ׳ because he (the Lord in establishing the world) took possession and gave (his creatures) possession (invested them with a fief), and became the sovereign of the world. Kidd.I, 1 האשה קוֹנָה את עצמהוכ׳ a wife acquires herself (becomes independent) when she receives her divorce Ib. 20a כל הקוֹנֶה … כקונהוכ׳ whoever buys a Hebrew bondman creates, as it were, a master over himself. B. Mets.75b הקונה אדון לעצמו he who creates a master over himself, expl. תולה נכסיו בנכרי who (in order to evade obligations) hangs his property on a gentile (pretends to be merely the agent of a gentile); (another explan.) הכותב נכסיווכ׳ who transfers his property to his children during his lifetime. Gitt.37b sq. (ref. to Lev. 25:45) אתם קוֹנִיםוכ׳ you may buy (as a slave) one of them, but they cannot buy one of you, nor can they buy of one another. Ib. יכול לא יִקְנוּ זה את זה למעשה ידיו you may think, they cannot buy one another for the work (as long as the serf choses to be in the masters power); ולא הם קוֹנִים … לגופו they cannot buy of one another a bodily slave (who requires formal manumission to be a freeman). B. Mets.46b bot. מכור לי באלו ק׳ if one says, sell me (a certain object) for these (coins which I hold in my hand), he has bought (the sale is valid). Ib. IV, 1 הזהב קונהוכ׳, v. זָהָב. Ib. מעות הרעות קוֹנוֹתוכ׳ the delivery of cancelled coins effects the purchase of the valid coins. Ib. 47b מעות קונות the delivery of the purchasing money gives possession (no formal possession of the purchased object (מְשִׁיכָה) being required). Kidd.22b הגבהה קונה lifting up the purchased object makes the sale binding; a. v. fr. 2) to make sure; to obligate a person by a special symbolical act (קִנְיָן); to enter into an obligation by a special symbolical form. Gitt.51a בשקָנוּ מידו when they (the court, witnesses) made him obligate himself (that his widow should receive support from his estate); בשקנו לזו ולא קנו לזו when such an obligation was entered with reference to this (his wifes case), but not with reference to that (his daughters case). B. Mets.47a במה קונין … בכליו של קונה wherewith is the bargain made sure?… By handing over one of the garments (or any object) belonging to the purchaser; דניחא ליה לקונה דליהוי מקנה קונהוכ׳ for the purchaser likes the seller to obligate himself, in order that he may be sure to give him possession; a. fr.Ib. 48b when he said to him, ערבוני יָקוּן (fr. קון = קנה) my earnest money shall serve to make the purchase sure.Part. pass. קָנוּי; f. קְנוּיָה; pl. קְנוּיִים, קְנוּיִין; קְנוּיוֹת. Kidd.16a עבד עברי גופו ק׳ והרבוכ׳ a Hebrew bondman is owned bodily (to the end of his term), and if the master allowed him a reduction of his time, his allowance is not legally binding (the slave not being able to acquire himself); ib. 28a; B. Kam. 113b. Gen. R. s. 86 (ref. to Gen. 39:1) הקנויין קונין וכלוכ׳ as a rule those who are owned make themselves owners (slaves enrich themselves by robbing their master), and all slaves cause decrease to their masters house, but in this case ‘the Lord blessed (ib. 5); Yalk. ib. 145 הקונין קונין (corr. acc.); a. fr.Tosef.Ned.IV, 6 קונם … שאני קנוי the axe of which I am possessed be forbidden (v. קוֹנָם), i. e. I swear that I have no axe; Ned.35a (Rashi שאינו ק׳ I swear that another axe is not owned by me).Y.Peah IV, 18b השעה קנויה, read: פְּנוּיָה, v. פָּנוּי. Nif. נִקְנֶה to be acquired, owned, bought. Kidd.20a (ref. to Lev. 25:14) דבר הנ׳ מיד ליד this refers to what is bought from hand to hand (movable goods). Ib. I, 1 האשה נִקְנֵיתוכ׳ a wife can be acquired in three ways. Ib. 6b אין אשה נ׳ בחליפין a wife cannot be taken possession of by symbolical delivery (חֲלִיפִין). Ib. I, 3 עבד כנעני נ׳ בכסףוכ׳ a Canaanite slave is taken possession of (is considered owned) either by delivery of the purchasing money, or by a deed, or by undisturbed possession (חֲזָקָה). Ib. 5 נכסים שיש … נִקְנִיןוכ׳ landed property is acquired by means of handing over the money, but movables cannot be acquired otherwise than by taking hold (מְשִׁיכָה). Ib. 22b תִּקָּנֶה בביאח let her be acquired (become his slave) by coition; a. fr. Hif. הִקְנָה to give possession, sell, transfer. R. Hash. l. c., v. supra. Snh.81b ולמַקְנוֹ, v. קוֹנֶה. Keth.82b אשה הִקְנוּ לווכ׳ it is heaven that gave him a wife (through his brothers death without issue); Yeb.39a. B. Mets.47a בכליו של מַקְנֶה, v. supra. Ib. 33b, a. fr. אין אדם מקנה דברוכ׳ none can give possession of (sell) what does not yet exist (future crops); a. fr.Esth. R. introd. (ref. to Deut. 28:68 sq.) למה ואין קונה …ע״י שלא הִקְנִיתֶם אלהוכ׳ why ‘no purchaser?… Because you have not transmitted ‘these words of the covenant, for there is none among you making the five books of the Law his own (v. קוֹנֶה).

    Jewish literature > קנה

  • 16 קָנָה

    קני, קָנָה(b. h.) ( to estabIish, 1) (cmp. קום, Gen. 23:17) to create; to acquire, own; to take possession. R. Hash. 31a (ref. to Ps. 24 recited in the Temple on the first day of the week) על שם שק׳ והקנהוכ׳ because he (the Lord in establishing the world) took possession and gave (his creatures) possession (invested them with a fief), and became the sovereign of the world. Kidd.I, 1 האשה קוֹנָה את עצמהוכ׳ a wife acquires herself (becomes independent) when she receives her divorce Ib. 20a כל הקוֹנֶה … כקונהוכ׳ whoever buys a Hebrew bondman creates, as it were, a master over himself. B. Mets.75b הקונה אדון לעצמו he who creates a master over himself, expl. תולה נכסיו בנכרי who (in order to evade obligations) hangs his property on a gentile (pretends to be merely the agent of a gentile); (another explan.) הכותב נכסיווכ׳ who transfers his property to his children during his lifetime. Gitt.37b sq. (ref. to Lev. 25:45) אתם קוֹנִיםוכ׳ you may buy (as a slave) one of them, but they cannot buy one of you, nor can they buy of one another. Ib. יכול לא יִקְנוּ זה את זה למעשה ידיו you may think, they cannot buy one another for the work (as long as the serf choses to be in the masters power); ולא הם קוֹנִים … לגופו they cannot buy of one another a bodily slave (who requires formal manumission to be a freeman). B. Mets.46b bot. מכור לי באלו ק׳ if one says, sell me (a certain object) for these (coins which I hold in my hand), he has bought (the sale is valid). Ib. IV, 1 הזהב קונהוכ׳, v. זָהָב. Ib. מעות הרעות קוֹנוֹתוכ׳ the delivery of cancelled coins effects the purchase of the valid coins. Ib. 47b מעות קונות the delivery of the purchasing money gives possession (no formal possession of the purchased object (מְשִׁיכָה) being required). Kidd.22b הגבהה קונה lifting up the purchased object makes the sale binding; a. v. fr. 2) to make sure; to obligate a person by a special symbolical act (קִנְיָן); to enter into an obligation by a special symbolical form. Gitt.51a בשקָנוּ מידו when they (the court, witnesses) made him obligate himself (that his widow should receive support from his estate); בשקנו לזו ולא קנו לזו when such an obligation was entered with reference to this (his wifes case), but not with reference to that (his daughters case). B. Mets.47a במה קונין … בכליו של קונה wherewith is the bargain made sure?… By handing over one of the garments (or any object) belonging to the purchaser; דניחא ליה לקונה דליהוי מקנה קונהוכ׳ for the purchaser likes the seller to obligate himself, in order that he may be sure to give him possession; a. fr.Ib. 48b when he said to him, ערבוני יָקוּן (fr. קון = קנה) my earnest money shall serve to make the purchase sure.Part. pass. קָנוּי; f. קְנוּיָה; pl. קְנוּיִים, קְנוּיִין; קְנוּיוֹת. Kidd.16a עבד עברי גופו ק׳ והרבוכ׳ a Hebrew bondman is owned bodily (to the end of his term), and if the master allowed him a reduction of his time, his allowance is not legally binding (the slave not being able to acquire himself); ib. 28a; B. Kam. 113b. Gen. R. s. 86 (ref. to Gen. 39:1) הקנויין קונין וכלוכ׳ as a rule those who are owned make themselves owners (slaves enrich themselves by robbing their master), and all slaves cause decrease to their masters house, but in this case ‘the Lord blessed (ib. 5); Yalk. ib. 145 הקונין קונין (corr. acc.); a. fr.Tosef.Ned.IV, 6 קונם … שאני קנוי the axe of which I am possessed be forbidden (v. קוֹנָם), i. e. I swear that I have no axe; Ned.35a (Rashi שאינו ק׳ I swear that another axe is not owned by me).Y.Peah IV, 18b השעה קנויה, read: פְּנוּיָה, v. פָּנוּי. Nif. נִקְנֶה to be acquired, owned, bought. Kidd.20a (ref. to Lev. 25:14) דבר הנ׳ מיד ליד this refers to what is bought from hand to hand (movable goods). Ib. I, 1 האשה נִקְנֵיתוכ׳ a wife can be acquired in three ways. Ib. 6b אין אשה נ׳ בחליפין a wife cannot be taken possession of by symbolical delivery (חֲלִיפִין). Ib. I, 3 עבד כנעני נ׳ בכסףוכ׳ a Canaanite slave is taken possession of (is considered owned) either by delivery of the purchasing money, or by a deed, or by undisturbed possession (חֲזָקָה). Ib. 5 נכסים שיש … נִקְנִיןוכ׳ landed property is acquired by means of handing over the money, but movables cannot be acquired otherwise than by taking hold (מְשִׁיכָה). Ib. 22b תִּקָּנֶה בביאח let her be acquired (become his slave) by coition; a. fr. Hif. הִקְנָה to give possession, sell, transfer. R. Hash. l. c., v. supra. Snh.81b ולמַקְנוֹ, v. קוֹנֶה. Keth.82b אשה הִקְנוּ לווכ׳ it is heaven that gave him a wife (through his brothers death without issue); Yeb.39a. B. Mets.47a בכליו של מַקְנֶה, v. supra. Ib. 33b, a. fr. אין אדם מקנה דברוכ׳ none can give possession of (sell) what does not yet exist (future crops); a. fr.Esth. R. introd. (ref. to Deut. 28:68 sq.) למה ואין קונה …ע״י שלא הִקְנִיתֶם אלהוכ׳ why ‘no purchaser?… Because you have not transmitted ‘these words of the covenant, for there is none among you making the five books of the Law his own (v. קוֹנֶה).

    Jewish literature > קָנָה

  • 17 ayudar

    v.
    to help.
    ayudar a alguien a hacer algo to help somebody (to) do something
    ¿en qué puedo ayudarle? how can I help you?
    ¿puedo ayudar? can I help?
    Ella asiste a todo el mundo She helps everybody.
    * * *
    1 to help, aid, assist
    ■ ¿en qué podemos ayudarte? how can we help you?
    1 (apoyarse) to make use (de/con, of)
    * * *
    verb
    to help, aid, assist
    * * *
    1.
    VT (=asistir) to help, assist, aid

    ¿me puedes ayudar con la limpieza esta tarde? — can you help me out with the cleaning this afternoon?

    me ayuda muchísimo — he's a great help to me, he helps me a lot

    2.
    See:
    AYUDAR Ayudar se puede traducir por help, assist y aid. ► La manera más frecuente de traducir ayudar es por help. Si help va seguido de un verbo, este puede ir en infinitivo {con} {o} {sin} to: ¿Puedes ayudarnos? Can you help (us)? Siempre le ayuda con la tarea He always helps her with her homework ¿Me puedes ayudar a preparar la cena? Can you help me (to) get dinner ready? ► Ayudar se traduce por assist en un registro bastante más formal y se construye frecuentemente en la estructura to assist somebody with something: La comadrona ayudó al médico con el parto The midwife assisted the doctor with the delivery ► Ayudar se traduce por aid en inglés formal en el contexto de asesorar o prestar ayuda a un grupo de personas necesitadas: ... los intentos de Estados Unidos de ayudar a los refugiados kurdos...... attempts by the United States to aid Kurdish refugees... Para otros usos y ejemplos ver la entrada
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo to help

    ¿te ayudo? — do you need any help?

    ayudar a alguien a + inf — to help somebody (to) + inf

    2.
    ayudar vi to help

    ¿puedo ayudar en algo? — can o shall I give you a hand?, can I do anything to help?

    ayudar a or en misa — to serve at mass

    3.
    ayudarse v pron to help oneself

    ayudarse de or con algo: camina ayudándose de or con un bastón — he walks with the aid o help of a stick

    * * *
    = aid, do + good, encourage, enlighten, help, provide + assistance, provide + guidance, tide over, assist, jump-start [jump start], lend + a (helping) hand, pull + Posesivo + (own) weight, give + Nombre + a hand, pull together, put + Posesivo + shoulder to the wheel, set + Posesivo + shoulder to the wheel, muck in, pitch in, chip in, succour [succor, -USA].
    Ex. Although others aided in the compilation of the schedules they were essentially the work of one man.
    Ex. You do not do the users a lot of good when you send them jumping all over the catalog simply to draw together material.
    Ex. A common catalogue encourages users to regard the different information carrying media as part of range of media.
    Ex. Librarians often work with students who possess few library skills and teachers whose assignments neither improve these skills nor enlighten the students on their research.
    Ex. How can we help library users to gain confidence?.
    Ex. Its purpose is to provide advice and on-site salvage assistance to those organisations having documentary resources that are damaged in a natural or man-made disaster.
    Ex. There are standards which provide guidance on the construction of thesauri.
    Ex. Reading aloud, in these circumstances, might be the only contact the adolescent gets with literature, tiding him over to the time when he is prepared to read for himself again.
    Ex. Any project which assists the use of coal and steel would be eligible.
    Ex. Jump-start your learning experience by participating in 1 or 2 half-day seminars that will help you come up to speed on the new vocabularies, processes and architectures underlying effective content management.
    Ex. In a small shop the master would lend a hand with the work, certainly as a corrector and often as a compositor as well.
    Ex. Sometimes one person is left with all the work because their partner doesn't pull their weight.
    Ex. These centres help women rebuild lives by giving them a hand up, not a handout.
    Ex. She tells a story of courage in which the crew and the mission control pull together to work the problem through.
    Ex. They've all been putting their shoulder to the wheel and it's paid off.
    Ex. The Bolsheviks have manfully set their shoulders to the wheel undaunted by this staggering catastrophe.
    Ex. All our neighbours, relatives, friends, we all mucked in and helped each other -- they were mostly all women because all the men had gone to war.
    Ex. It's up to everyone to pitch in and help those who find themselves lacking the most basic of necessities -- food.
    Ex. We're asking you to 'chip in' by investing your time and talents in your parks and your community.
    Ex. There are tens of thousands of hungry children in the world today and well-meant efforts are being made to succour them.
    ----
    * a quien madruga, Dios le ayuda = the early bird catches the worm.
    * ayudar a = play + an instrumental role in.
    * ayudar a Alguien a recuperarse = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * ayudar a Alguien a salir adelante = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * ayudar a comprender mejor = offer + insights, improve + understanding, give + an insight into, glean + insights, provide + insight into, lend + understanding to.
    * ayudar a conocer mejor = advance + understanding.
    * ayudar a eliminar obstáculos = clear + the path, clear + the way.
    * ayudar a entender mejor = lend + understanding to.
    * ayudar a + Infinitivo = go some (of the) way to(wards) + Gerundio.
    * ayudar a la causa de = help + in the cause of.
    * ayudar a + Nombre/Infinitivo = assist in + Nombre/Gerundio.
    * ayudar a pasar por = get + Nombre + through.
    * ayudar a superar = get + Nombre + through.
    * ayudar bastante a = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * ayudar e instigar = aid and abet.
    * dispuesto a ayudar = willing, willing to help.
    * estar siempre dispuesto a ayudar = be always willing to assist.
    * que no ayuda a distinguir = nondistinctive.
    * utensilio para ayudar a caminar = walking aid.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo to help

    ¿te ayudo? — do you need any help?

    ayudar a alguien a + inf — to help somebody (to) + inf

    2.
    ayudar vi to help

    ¿puedo ayudar en algo? — can o shall I give you a hand?, can I do anything to help?

    ayudar a or en misa — to serve at mass

    3.
    ayudarse v pron to help oneself

    ayudarse de or con algo: camina ayudándose de or con un bastón — he walks with the aid o help of a stick

    * * *
    = aid, do + good, encourage, enlighten, help, provide + assistance, provide + guidance, tide over, assist, jump-start [jump start], lend + a (helping) hand, pull + Posesivo + (own) weight, give + Nombre + a hand, pull together, put + Posesivo + shoulder to the wheel, set + Posesivo + shoulder to the wheel, muck in, pitch in, chip in, succour [succor, -USA].

    Ex: Although others aided in the compilation of the schedules they were essentially the work of one man.

    Ex: You do not do the users a lot of good when you send them jumping all over the catalog simply to draw together material.
    Ex: A common catalogue encourages users to regard the different information carrying media as part of range of media.
    Ex: Librarians often work with students who possess few library skills and teachers whose assignments neither improve these skills nor enlighten the students on their research.
    Ex: How can we help library users to gain confidence?.
    Ex: Its purpose is to provide advice and on-site salvage assistance to those organisations having documentary resources that are damaged in a natural or man-made disaster.
    Ex: There are standards which provide guidance on the construction of thesauri.
    Ex: Reading aloud, in these circumstances, might be the only contact the adolescent gets with literature, tiding him over to the time when he is prepared to read for himself again.
    Ex: Any project which assists the use of coal and steel would be eligible.
    Ex: Jump-start your learning experience by participating in 1 or 2 half-day seminars that will help you come up to speed on the new vocabularies, processes and architectures underlying effective content management.
    Ex: In a small shop the master would lend a hand with the work, certainly as a corrector and often as a compositor as well.
    Ex: Sometimes one person is left with all the work because their partner doesn't pull their weight.
    Ex: These centres help women rebuild lives by giving them a hand up, not a handout.
    Ex: She tells a story of courage in which the crew and the mission control pull together to work the problem through.
    Ex: They've all been putting their shoulder to the wheel and it's paid off.
    Ex: The Bolsheviks have manfully set their shoulders to the wheel undaunted by this staggering catastrophe.
    Ex: All our neighbours, relatives, friends, we all mucked in and helped each other -- they were mostly all women because all the men had gone to war.
    Ex: It's up to everyone to pitch in and help those who find themselves lacking the most basic of necessities -- food.
    Ex: We're asking you to 'chip in' by investing your time and talents in your parks and your community.
    Ex: There are tens of thousands of hungry children in the world today and well-meant efforts are being made to succour them
    .
    * a quien madruga, Dios le ayuda = the early bird catches the worm.
    * ayudar a = play + an instrumental role in.
    * ayudar a Alguien a recuperarse = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * ayudar a Alguien a salir adelante = help + Nombre + get on + Posesivo + feet.
    * ayudar a comprender mejor = offer + insights, improve + understanding, give + an insight into, glean + insights, provide + insight into, lend + understanding to.
    * ayudar a conocer mejor = advance + understanding.
    * ayudar a eliminar obstáculos = clear + the path, clear + the way.
    * ayudar a entender mejor = lend + understanding to.
    * ayudar a + Infinitivo = go some (of the) way to(wards) + Gerundio.
    * ayudar a la causa de = help + in the cause of.
    * ayudar a + Nombre/Infinitivo = assist in + Nombre/Gerundio.
    * ayudar a pasar por = get + Nombre + through.
    * ayudar a superar = get + Nombre + through.
    * ayudar bastante a = go + a long way (towards/to/in) + Gerundio.
    * ayudar e instigar = aid and abet.
    * dispuesto a ayudar = willing, willing to help.
    * estar siempre dispuesto a ayudar = be always willing to assist.
    * que no ayuda a distinguir = nondistinctive.
    * utensilio para ayudar a caminar = walking aid.

    * * *
    ayudar [A1 ]
    vt
    to help
    ayudar al prójimo to help one's neighbor
    ¿te ayudo? do you need any help?, can o shall I help you?, can o shall I give you a hand? ( colloq)
    vino a ayudarme unos días she came to help me out for a few days
    ayudar a algn CON algo to help sb WITH sth
    ayuda a tu hermano con los deberes help your brother with his homework
    mis padres me ayudaron con los gastos de la fiesta my parents helped me (out) with the cost of the party
    ayudar a algn A + INF to help sb (to) + INF
    ayúdame a poner la mesa help me (to) set the table
    lo ayudé a arreglar la moto I helped him (to) fix his motorbike
    ■ ayudar
    vi
    to help
    ¿puedo ayudar en algo? can o shall I give you a hand?, can I do anything to help?, can I help you with anything?
    ayudar a or en misa to serve at mass
    to help oneself
    tú mismo tienes que ayudarte you've got to do something to help yourself
    para ayudarse empezó a dar clases de inglés he started giving English classes to earn a bit more money
    ayudarse DE or CON algo:
    camina ayudándose de or con un bastón he walks with the aid o help of a stick, he walks with a stick
    * * *

     

    ayudar ( conjugate ayudar) verbo transitivo
    to help;

    ¿te ayudo? do you need any help?;
    vino a ayudarme she came to help me out;
    ayúdame a poner la mesa help me (to) set the table
    verbo intransitivo
    to help;
    ¿puedo ayudar en algo? can I do anything to help?
    ayudar verbo transitivo to help: ¿puedes ayudarme a mover la mesa?, can you help me to move the table? ➣ Ver nota en help

    ' ayudar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    hacer
    - imposible
    - volcarse
    - asistir
    - condición
    - dedicar
    - favorecer
    - mano
    - mucho
    - poco
    - pretender
    - solícito
    English:
    aid
    - appreciate
    - assist
    - back
    - desire
    - finger
    - fund
    - help
    - help out
    - minister
    - offer
    - ostensible
    - pitch in
    - propensity
    - see
    - short
    - talk down
    - tide over
    - unable
    - useful
    - wave aside
    - anything
    - do
    - not
    - patch
    - precious
    - rally
    - rely
    - sorry
    - unhelpful
    - way
    - well
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    to help;
    ayudar a alguien a hacer algo to help sb (to) do sth;
    me ayudaron a subir el piano they helped me carry the piano up;
    una profesora particular le ayuda en los estudios a private tutor is helping him with his studies;
    necesito que me ayuden con este problema I need your help with this problem;
    ¿en qué puedo ayudarle? how can I help you?
    ♦ vi
    to help;
    ¿puedo ayudar? can I help?
    * * *
    v/t help;
    ¿le ayudo? can I help?, would you like some help?;
    le ayudó a ponerse el abrigo he helped her put on her coat
    * * *
    ayudar vt
    : to help, to assist
    * * *
    ayudar vb to help

    Spanish-English dictionary > ayudar

  • 18 EIGA

    * * *
    I)
    (á, átta, áttr), v.
    1) to own, possess (Starkaðr átti hest góðan);
    2) to have (eiga börn, föður, móður, vin);
    hann átti Gró, he was married to G.;
    hann gekk at eiga Þóru, he took Th. for his wife, he married Th.;
    enga vil ek þessa eiga, I will not marry any of these;
    eiga heima, to have a home, to live (þeir áttu heima austr í Mörk);
    eiga sér e-t = eiga e-t (Höskuldr átti sér dóttur, er Hallgerðr hét);
    eiga ván e-s, to have hope of a thing, to reckon upon;
    eiga hlut at or í e-u, to have a share in a thing, to be concerned in;
    eiga vald á e-u, to have within one’s power;
    3) to be under obligation, be obliged, have to do a thing;
    tólf menn, þeir er fylgð áttu með konungi, who were bound to attend the king’s person;
    á ek þar fyrir at sjá, I am bound (I have) to see to that;
    átti Hrútr för í Vestfjorðu, H. had to go to the V.;
    4) to have a right (claim) to, be entitled to (eiga högg ok höfn í skóginum);
    eiga mál í e-m, to have a charge against one;
    5) to keep, hold;
    eiga fund, þing, samkvámu, stefnu, to hold a meeting;
    eiga kaupstefnu, to hod a market;
    eiga orrustu við e-n, to fight a battle with one;
    eiga högg við e-n, to exchange blows with one;
    eiga illt við e-n, to quarrel with;
    eiga tal (or mál) við e-n, to speak, converse with one;
    6) as an auxiliary with pp. = hafa (þat er við áttum mælt);
    eiga skilit, to have stipulated;
    7) to have to (skal Þ. eigi at því eiga at spotta);
    eiga hendr sínar it verja, to have to act in self-defence;
    eiga um vandræði at halda, to be in a strait;
    8) eiga e-m e-t, to owe to one (mun æ, hvat þú átt þeim er veitir);
    þat muntu ætla, at ek mun eiga hinn bleika uxann, that the fawn-coloured ox means me;
    10) with preps.:
    eiga e-t at e-m, to have something due from one, to expect from one (þat vil ek eiga at þér, at þú segir mér frá ferð þinni);
    to deserve from one (ok á ek annat at þér);
    þeir er mikit þóttust at sér eiga, had much in their power;
    eiga e-t eptir, to have to do yet, to have left undone (þat áttu eptir, er erfiðast er, en þat er at deyja);
    to leave behind one (andaðist ok átti eptir tvá sonu vaxna);
    eiga e-t saman, to own in common;
    eiga skap saman, to agree well, be of one mind;
    eigi veit ek, hvárt við eigum heill saman, whether we shall live happy together;
    eiga saman, to quarrel, = eiga deild saman;
    eiga um við e-n, to have to deal with (við brögðótta áttu nú um);
    þar sem við vini mína er um at eiga, where my friends are concerned;
    eiga e-t undir e-m, to have in another’s hands;
    Njáll átti mikit fé undir Starkaði ok í Sandgili, N. had much money out at interest with St. and at Sandgil, er sá eigi vel staddr, er líf sitt á undir þinum trúnaði, whose life depends on thy good faith;
    eiga mikit (lítit) undir sér, to have much (little) in one’s power;
    far þú við marga menn, svá at þú eigir allt undir þér, that the whole matter rests in thy own hands;
    hann sá, at hann átti ekki undir sér, that he had no influence;
    eiga við e-n, to have to do with, fight with (brátt fundu þeir, at þeir áttu þar ekki við sinn maka);
    ekki á ek þetta við þik, this is no business between thee and me;
    eiga gott (illt) við e-n, to be on good (bad) terms with one;
    eiga við konu, to have intercourse with, = eiga lag (samræði) við konu;
    recipr., eigast við, to deal with one another; fight, quarrel;
    eigast við deildir, to be engaged in strife;
    áttust þeir höggvaskipti við, they exchanged blows with one another.
    f.
    kasta sinni eigu, leggja sína eigu, í e-t, to take possession of;
    * * *
    pret. átti; pret. subj. ætti, pres. eigi; pres. ind. á, 2nd pers. átt (irreg. eigr, Dipl. v. 24), pl. eigum, 3rd pers. pl. old form eigu, mod. eiga; imperat. eig and eigðu; sup. átt; with suffixed neg. pres. ind. 1st pers. á’k-at, 2nd pers. átt-attu; pret. subj. ættim-a: [Gr. ἔχω; Goth. aigan; A. S. âgan; Hel. êgan; O. H. G. eigan; Swed. äga; Dan. eje; Engl. to owe and own, of which the former etymologically answers to ‘eiga,’ the latter to ‘eigna’]:—to have, possess.
    A. ACT.
    I. denoting ownership, to possess:
    1. in a proper sense; allt þat góz sem þeir eiga eðr eigandi verða, D. N. i. 80; hann eigr hálfa jörðina, Dipl. v. 24; Björn hljóp þá á skútu er hann átti, Eb. 6; Starkaðr átti hest góðan, Nj. 89; þau áttu gnótt í búi, 257; hón á allan arf eptir mik, 3; átti hón auð fjár, Ld. 20; ef annarr maðr ferr með goðorð en sá er á, Grág. i. 159; annat vápnit, ok á þat Þorbjörn, en Þorgautr á þetta, Ísl. ii. 341; eignir þær er faðir hans hafði átt, Eb. 4; í ríki því er Dana konungar höfðu átt þar lengi, Fms. xi. 301, Rb. 494, Eb. 54, 118, 256, 328, Sturl. ii. 60, Eg. 118; e. saman, to own in common, Grág. i. 199; ef tveir menn eigo bú saman, ii. 44; e. skuld (at e-m), to be in debt, Engl. to owe; en ef hann átti engar skuldir, if he owed no debts, i. 128; þar til átti honum ( owed him) meistari Þorgeirr ok þá mörk, D. N. iv. 288 (Fr.); e. fé undir e-m, to be one’s creditor, Nj. 101; in mod. usage, e. fé hjá e-m, or ellipt., e. hjá e-m.
    2. in a special sense;
    α. eiga konu, to have her to wife; hann átti Gró, Eb. 16; hann átti Ynghvildi, 3; Þorgerðr er (acc.) átti Vigfúss, … Geirríðr er (acc.) átti Þórólfr, 18; hann gékk at eiga Þóru, he married Thora, id.; Þuríði hafði hann áðr átta, Thorida had been his first wife, 42; enga vil ek þessa e., I will not marry any of these, Nj. 22; Björn átti þá konu er Valgerðr hét, 213, 257; faðir Hróðnýjar er átti Þorsteinn, Landn. 90; Ásdísi átti síðar Skúli, S. was A.’s second husband, 88; Þorgerðr er átti Önundr sjóni, 89; Vigdís er átti Þorbjörn enn digri, 87; Árnþrúðr er átti Þórir hersir, 66; Húngerð er átti Svertingr, 6l, 86, and in numberless passages: old writers hardly ever say that the wife owns her husband—the passages in Edda 109 (vide elja) and Nj. 52 (til lítils kemr mér at eiga hinn vaskasta mann á Íslandi) are extraordinary—owing to the primitive notion of the husband’s ‘jus possessionis’ (cp. brúðkaup); but in mod. usage ‘eiga’ is used indiscriminately of both wife and husband; Icel. even say, in a recipr. sense, eigast, to own one another, to be married: þau áttust, they married; hann vildi ekki at þau ættist, hann bannaði þeim að eigast, he forbade them to marry:—to the ancients such a phrase was almost unknown, and occurs for the first time in K. Á. 114.
    β. eiga börn, to have children, of both parents; áttu þau Jófriðr tíu börn, J. and her husband had ten bairns, Eg. 708; hann átti dóttur eina er Unnr hét, Nj. 1; þau Þorsteinn ok Unnr áttu son er Steinn hét, Eb. 10, Nj. 91, 257; áttu þau Þórhildr þrjá sonu, 30; e. móður, föður, to have a mother, father, Eb. 98; vænti ek ok, at þú eigir illan föður, id.
    γ. the phrase, e. heima, to have a home; þeir áttu heima austr í Mörk, Nj. 55; því at ek tek eigi heim í kveld, þar sem ek á heima út á Íslandi, 275; in mod. usage = to live, abide, in regard to place, cp. the questions put to a stranger, hvað heitir maðrinn? hvar áttu heima? used in a wider sense than búa.
    δ. eiga sér, to have, cp. ‘havde sig’ in Dan. ballads; Höskuldr átti sér dóttur er Hallgerðr hét, Nj. 3; ef hann á sér í vá veru, Hm. 25, (freq. in mod. use.)
    3. without strict notion of possession; e. vini, óvini, to have friends, enemies, Nj. 101; hverja liðveizlu skal ek þar e. er þú ert, what help can I reckon upon from thee? 100; e. ván e-s, to have hope of a thing, to reckon upon, 210; e. til, to have left; ekki eigu it annat til ( there is nothing left for you) nema at biðja postulann. Jóh. 623. 22: in mod. usage e. til means to own, to have left; hann á ekkert til, he is void of means, needy; eiga góða kosti fjár, to be in good circumstances, Ísl. ii. 322; e. vald á e-u, to have within one’s power, Nj. 265; the phrase, e. hlut at e-u, or e. hlut í e-u, to have a share, be concerned with; eptir þat átti hann hlut at við mótstöðumenn Gunnars, 101, 120; þar er þú ættir hlut at, where thou wast concerned, 119; mik uggir at hér muni eigi gæfu-menn hlut í e., 179: hence ellipt., e. í e-u, to be engaged in, chiefly of strife, adversity, or the like; thus, e. í stríði, fátaekt, baráttu, to live, be deep in struggle, want, battle, etc.
    II. denoting duty, right, due, obligation:
    1. to be bound, etc.; þeir menn er fylgð áttu með konungi, the men who owed following to (i. e. were bound to attend) the king’s person, Fms. vii. 240; á ek þar fyrir at sjá, I am bound to see to that, Eg. 318; Tylptar-kviðr átti um at skilja, Eb. 48; þeir spurðu hvárt Njáli þætti nokkut e. at lýsa vígsök Gunnars, Nj. 117; nú áttu, Sigvaldi, now is thy turn, now ought thou, Fms. xi. 109, Fs. 121; menn eigu ( men ought) at spyrja at þingfesti, Grág. i. 19; þá á þann kvið einskis meta, that verdict ought to be void, 59; ef sá maðr á ( owns) fé út hér er ómagann á ( who ought) fram at færa, 270; nú hafa þeir menn jammarga sem þeir eigu, as many as they ought to have, ii. 270; tíunda á maðr fé sitt, … þá á hann þat at tíunda, … þá á hann at gefa sálugjafir, i. 202:—‘eiga’ and ‘skal’ are often in the law used indiscriminately, but properly ‘ought’ states the moral, ‘shall’ the legal obligation,—elska skalt þú föður þinn og móður, þú skalt ekki stela, where ‘átt’ would be misplaced; sometimes it is merely permissive, gefa á maðr vingjafir at sér lifanda, ef hann vill, a man ‘may’ whilst in life bequeath to his friends, if he will, id.; maðr á at gefa barni sínu laungetnu tólf aura, ef hann vill, fyrir ráð skaparfa sinna, en eigi meira nema erfingjar lofi, a man ‘may’ bequeath to the amount of twelve ounces to his illegitimate child without leave of the lawful heir, etc., 203; ef þat á til at vilja, if that is to happen, Fas. i. 11.
    2. denoting claim, right, to own, be entitled to, chiefly in law phrases; e. dóm, sakir, to own the case, i. e. be the lawful prosecutor; ok á sá þeirra sakir, er …, Grág. i. 10; eðr eigu þeir eigi at lögum, or if they be not entitled to it, 94; e. mál á e-m, to have a charge against one, Nj. 105; e. rétt á e-u, to own a right; sá sem rétt á á henni, who has a right to her, K. Á. 16; þeir sögðu at þeim þótti slíkr maðr mikinn rétt á sér e., such a man had a strong personal claim to redress, Nj. 105; hence the phrase, eiga öngan rétt á sér, if one cannot claim redress for personal injury; þá eigu þeir eigi rétt á sér, then they have no claim to redress whatever, Grág. i. 261; e. sök, saka-staði á e-u, to have a charge against; þat er hann átti öngva sök á, Nj. 130; saka-staði þá er hann þótti á eiga, 166; kalla Vermund eigi ( not) eiga at selja sik, said V. had no right to sell them, Eb. 116: hence in mod. usage, eiga denotes what is fit and right, þú átt ekki að göra það, you ought not; eg ætti ekki, I ought not: in old writers eiga is seldom strictly used in this sense, but denotes the legal rather than the moral right.
    β. eiga fé at e-m (mod. e. hjá e-m), to be one’s creditor, Grág. i. 90, 405, Band. 1 C: metaph. to deserve from one, ok áttu annat at mér, Nj. 113; e. gjafir at e-m, 213; in a bad sense, kváðusk mikit e. at Þráni, they had much against Thrain, 138.
    γ. the law phrase, e. útkvæmt, fært, to have the right to return, of a temporary exile, Nj. 251: at hann skyli eigi e. fært út hingat, Grág. i. 119; ok á eigi þingreitt, is not allowed to go to the parliament, ii. 17; e. vígt, Grág., etc.
    III. denoting dealings or transactions between men (in a meeting, fight, trade, or the like), to keep, hold; þætti mér ráðliga at vér ættim einn fimtardóm, Nj. 150; e. orrustu við e-n, to fight a battle, Fms. i. 5, Eg. 7; e. högg við e-n, to exchange blows, 297; e. vápna-viðskipti, id., Fms. ii. 17; eiga handsöl at e-u, to shake hands, make a bargain, x. 248; e. ráð við e-n, to consult, hold a conference with, Nj. 127; e. tal við e-n, to speak, converse with one, 129; e. mál við e-n, id., Grág. i. 10; e. fund, to hold a meeting, Nj. 158; e. þing, samkvámu, stefnu, to hold a meeting, Eg. 271; þetta haust áttu menn rétt (a kind of meeting) fjölmenna, Eb. 106; e. kaupstefnu, to hold a market, exchange, 56; e. féránsdóm, Grág. i. 94; e. gott saman, to live well together, in peace and goodwill, Ld. 38; e. illt við e-n, to deal ill with, quarrel with, Nj. 98; e. búisifjar, q. v., of intercourse with neighbours, Njarð. 366; e. drykkju við e-n, to be one’s ‘cup-mate,’ Eg. 253; e. við e-n, to deal with one; ekki á ek þetta við þik, this is no business between thee and me, Nj. 93; gott vilda ek við alla menn e., I would live in goodwill with all, 47; e. við e-n, to fight one; eigum vér ekki við þá elligar (in a hostile sense), else let us not provoke them, 42; eðr hvárt vili it Helgi e. við Lýting einn eðr bræðr hans báða, 154; brátt fundu þeir, at þeir áttu þar eigi við sinn maka, Ld. 64; Glúmr kvað hann ekki þurfa at e. við sik, G. said he had no need to meddle with him, Glúm. 338; e. um að vera, to be concerned; ekki er við menn um at e., Nj. 97; þar sem við vini mína er um at e., where my friends are concerned, 52; við færi er þá um at e., ef Kári er einn, there are fewer to deal with, to fight, if K. be alone, 254; við brögðótta áttu nú um, Fms. v. 263; ætla ek at oss mun léttara falla at e. um við Svein einn, iv. 80; Sveinn svarar, at þeir áttu við ofrefli um at e., that they had to deal with odds, 165.
    β. almost as an auxiliary verb; e. skilt (skilit), to have stipulated; hafa gripina svá sem hann átti skill, Fms. vi. 160; þat átta ek skilit við þik, ii. 93; sem Hrani átti skilt, iv. 31; e. mælt, of oral agreement; sem vit áttum mælt með okkr, xi. 40; þá vil ek þat mælt e., 124: in mod. usage e. skilit means to deserve, eg á ekki þetta skilit af hér, etc.
    γ. sometimes used much like geta; við því átti Búi eigi gert, B. could not guard against that, Fms. i. 117, cp. xi. 109:—also, e. bágt, to be in a strait, poor, sickly; e. heimilt, to have at one’s disposal, Eb. 254.
    IV. to have to do; skal Þorleifr eigi ( not) e. at því at spotta, Eb. 224; e. hendr sínar at verja, to have to defend one’s own hands, to act in self-defence, Nj. 47; e. e-m varlaunað, to stand in debt to one, 181; e. um vandræði at halda, to be in a strait, Eb. 108; e. erindi, to have an errand to run, 250; en er þeir áttu um þetta at tala, when they had to talk, were talking, of this, Stj. 391; e. ríkis at gæta, to have the care of the kingdom, Nj. 126; en þó á ek hverki at telja við þik mægðir né frændsemi, i. e. I am no relation to thee, 213; ok ætti þeir við annan at deila fyrst, 111; e. mikið at vinna, to be much engaged, hard at work, 97; e. e-t eptir, to have left a thing undone, 56; e. för, ferð, to have a journey to take, 11, 12; hann átti þar fé at heimta, 261; e. eptir mikit at mæla, 88.
    2. metaph. in the phrases, e. mikit (lítið) ‘at’ ser, or ‘undir’ sér, to have much (or little) in one’s power; margir menn, þeir er mikit þóttusk at sér e., Sturl. i. 64; far þú við marga menn, svá at þú eigir allt undir þér, go with many men, so that thou hast the whole matter in thy hands, Ld. 250; en ávalt átta ek nokkuð undir mér, Vígl. 33; kann vera at hann eigi mikit undir sér, Fas. i. 37; eigum heldr undir oss ( better keep it in our own hands), en ganga í greipar þeim mæðginum, Fs. 37; sem þeir, er ekki eigu undir sér, who are helpless and weak, Þorst. St. 55; e. þykisk hann nokkut undir sér, i. e. he bears himself very proudly, Grett. 122; þetta ráð vil ek undir sonum mínum e., I will leave the matter in my sons’ hands, Valla L. 202; e. líf sitt undir e-m, to have one’s life in another’s hands, Grett. 154; mun ek nú senda eptir mönnum, ok e. eigi undir ójöfnuði hans, and trust him not, 110: hence in mod. usage, e. undir e-u, to risk; eg þori ekki að e. undir því, I dare not risk it: e. saman, to have or own in common; the saying, það á ekki saman nema nafnið, it has nothing but the name in common; rautt gull ok bleikt gull á ekki saman nema nafn eitt, Fms. v. 346: the proverb, þeygi á saman gamalt og ungt, Úlf. 3. 44; e. skap saman, to agree well; kemr þú þér því vel við Hallgerði, at it eigit meir skap saman, you are quite of one mind, Nj. 66; eigi veit ek hvárt við eigum heill saman, I know not whether we shall have luck, i. e. whether we shall live happy, together, 3.
    β. to deal with one another (sam-eign); er vér skulum svá miklu úgæfu saman e., that we are to have so much mischief between us, Nj. 201; e. e-t yfir höfði, to have a thing hanging over one’s head, Sks. 742.
    V. to agree with, to fit, to suit one:
    1. with acc., það á ekki við mig, it suits me not, it agrees not with me.
    2. with dat., medic. to agree, heal, the sickness in dat., thus the proverb, margt á við mörgu, cp. ‘similia similibus curantur,’ Vidal. ii. 109.
    3. absol. to apply to; at hann skyldi eigi trúa lágum manni rauðskeggjuðum, því at meistarinn átti þetta, the description suited to the master, Fms. xi. 433; þat muntu ætla, at ek muna e. hinn bleika uxann, that the dun ox means me, Vápn. 21.
    B. REFLEX., in a reciprocal sense, in the phrase, eigask við, to deal with one another, chiefly to fight; en er þeir höfðu langa hríð við átzk, when they had fought a long time, Eb. 238, 74; eigask við deildir, to be engaged in strife, 246; áttusk þeir höggva-viðskipti við, they came to a close fight, Fms. i. 38; áttusk þeir fá högg við, áðr …, they had a short fight before …, Eg. 297; fátt áttusk þeir við Þjóstólfr ok Þorvaldr, Thostolf and Thorwald had little to do with one another, kept aloof from each other, Nj. 18; var nú kyrt þann dag, svá at þeir áttusk ekki við, tbat day passed quietly, so that they came not to a quarrel, 222.
    β. to marry, vide above (A. I. 2).

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > EIGA

  • 19 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 20 prac|a

    Ⅰ f 1. sgt (działalność) work; (fizyczna) labour
    - mieć dużo pracy to have a lot of work (to do)
    - jest jeszcze dużo pracy there’s still a lot of work to be done
    - zabrać się a. wziąć się do pracy to set to a. get down to a. go to work
    - przykładać się do pracy to apply oneself to one’s work
    - przerwać pracę (zastrajkować) to come out a. go (out) on strike
    - włożyć w coś wiele pracy to put a lot of work into sth
    - dojść do majątku (własną) pracą to get wealthy through one’s own efforts
    - wszystko osiągnął ciężką pracą he owes everything to his own hard work
    - cała jego praca poszła na marne all his work came to naught a. went down the drain pot.
    - (jego) praca nad filmem/nową rolą (his) work on a film/a new role
    - praca przy a. na komputerze/taśmie work on the computer/the production line
    - praca z dziećmi upośledzonymi umysłowo work with mentally handicapped children
    - praca fizyczna physical work, manual labour
    - praca umysłowa (urzędnicza) white-collar work; (intelektualna) intellectual work
    - praca zarobkowa paid work, gainful employment
    - praca badawcza research work
    - praca społeczna voluntary a. community work
    - praca polityczna political activity
    - praca charytatywna charity work
    - praca papierkowa paperwork
    - praca niewolnicza slave labour
    - praca ponad siły superhuman work
    - praca zespołowa team work
    - praca w grupach group work
    - człowiek pracy a working man
    - świat pracy the working classes, the world of work
    - narzędzia pracy tools; przen. the tools of the trade
    - nawał a. ogrom pracy pressure of work
    - podział pracy Ekon. the division of labour
    - tempo pracy the pace of work
    - wypadek przy pracy an accident at work; an industrial accident; przen. a mishap; a slip-up pot.
    - mieć pracę to be in work, to have a job
    - nie mieć pracy to be out of work a. out of a job
    - szukać pracy to look a. to be looking for work a. a job, to job-hunt
    - iść do pracy (zacząć zarabiać) to begin a. start work
    - rozpoczynać/kończyć pracę to begin a. start/finish work
    - dostać/stracić pracę to get/lose a job
    - zmienić pracę to change jobs
    - żyć z pracy własnych rąk to earn one’s living by honest work
    - dać komuś pracę to give sb work a. a job
    - zwolnić kogoś z pracy to give sb (their) notice, to dismiss sb
    - podziękować komuś za pracę to let sb go euf.
    - praca w pełnym/niepełnym wymiarze godzin a full-time/a part-time job
    - praca etatowa/stała a permanent/a steady job
    - praca dorywcza (fizyczna) an odd job, casual work; (biurowa) a temping job
    - praca sezonowa seasonal work
    - praca sezonowa przy zbiorze truskawek seasonal work as a strawberry picker
    - praca wakacyjna a holiday job
    - praca dodatkowa an extra job
    - praca na akord piecework
    - praca zlecona a. na zlecenie contract work
    - dorabiał do pensji pracami zleconymi he supplemented his income with contract work
    - praca na własny rachunek self-employment
    - praca z utrzymaniem a live-in job, work with bed and board
    - dobrze płatna praca a well-paid job
    - ciągłość pracy continuity of employment
    - staż pracy seniority, length of service
    - długi/krótki staż pracy long/short service
    - czas pracy working time a. hours
    - ruchomy czas pracy flexitime
    - dzień pracy a working day
    - godziny pracy (pracownika) working hours; (biura, sklepu) business hours
    - miejsce pracy work(place)
    - rynek pracy the labour market
    - zakład pracy workplace
    - umowa o pracę contract of employment, employment contract
    - nagroda za 10 lat pracy a bonus for 10 years of service
    3. (miejsce zatrudnienia) work
    - być w pracy to be at work
    - pójść/przyjść do pracy to go/come to work
    - jeszcze nie wrócił (do domu) z pracy he’s not home from work yet
    - ona zawsze spóźnia się do pracy she’s always late for work
    - nie dzwoń do mnie do pracy don’t phone me at work
    - koledzy/koleżanki z pracy colleagues from work, fellow workers, workmates
    - nieobecność w pracy absence from work
    4. (utwór, książka, obraz) work
    - praca monograficzna a monograph
    - praca źródłowa a study based on sources a. on source materials
    - praca o muzyce/sztuce a. na temat muzyki/sztuki a work on a. about music/art
    - praca z (zakresu a. dziedziny) genetyki a work on genetics
    - napisać/ogłosić pracę z zakresu fizyki to write/publish a paper on physics
    - wystawa prac młodych artystów an exhibition of work(s) by young artists
    - na konkurs zgłoszono 20 prac there were 20 entries for the competition
    - praca domowa homework
    - odrabiać pracę domową to do homework
    - zadać uczniom pracę domową to give pupils homework a. an assignment US
    - praca klasowa a class test
    - praca semestralna a term a. an end-of-term paper
    - praca egzaminacyjna an examination paper a. script
    - praca dyplomowa/magisterska a Bachelor’s dissertation/a Master’s dissertation a. master’s thesis
    - praca doktorska/habilitacyjna a doctoral/a postdoctoral dissertation
    - poprawiać prace studentów to mark students’ work
    6. sgt (funkcjonowanie) workings pl, functioning, operation
    - praca serca the action of the heart
    - zatrzymanie pracy serca cardiac arrest
    - praca mięśni the work of the muscles
    - praca nerek the functioning of the kidneys
    - praca nóg Sport footwork
    - praca umysłu ludzkiego the workings of the human mind
    - praca maszyny/silnika the work a. operation of a machine/an engine
    - praca bez zakłóceń smooth running
    7. Komput. job
    - sterowanie pracami job control
    - język sterowania pracami job control language
    - kolejka prac a job queue
    8. sgt Fiz. work
    - jednostka pracy unit of work
    Ⅱ prace plt work U
    - prace badawcze/badawczo-rozwojowe research/research and development work
    - prace przygotowawcze/wykończeniowe preparatory/completion work
    - prace murarskie/transportowe masonry a. bricklaying work/transport
    - prace remontowe/restauracyjne repair/restoration work
    - prace polowe/żniwne work in the field/harvesting
    - prace budowlane building work(s)
    - prace ziemne earthworks
    - prace budowlane jeszcze trwają the building work is still going on a. in progress
    - □ praca mechaniczna Techn. mechanical work także przen.
    - praca nieprodukcyjna Ekon. non-productive labour
    - praca organiczna Hist. ≈ organic work (a programme of economic and cultural development, launched by the Polish positivists)
    - praca produkcyjna Ekon. productive labour
    - praca u podstaw Hist. ≈ work at the grass roots (a programme of spreading literacy and popularizing science among the masses, launched by the Polish positivists)
    - prace domowe housework
    - prace ręczne Szkol. handicrafts
    ■ praca benedyktyńska książk. painstaking work
    - praca herkulesowa a Herculean task
    - praca syzyfowa książk. Sisyphean task a. labours
    - cześć pracy! pot. (pożegnanie) cheerio! pot.; (powitanie) howdy! US pot.
    - bez pracy nie ma kołaczy przysł. no gains without pains
    - cierpliwością i pracą ludzie się bogacą przysł. all things come to those who wait przysł.
    - jaka praca, taka płaca przysł. ≈ you only get paid for what you do
    - żadna praca nie hańbi przysł. ≈ honest work is nothing to be ashamed of
    - praca nie zając, nie ucieknie pot. work can wait

    The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > prac|a

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • Long John Nebel — (born John Zimmerman) (June 11, 1911 – April 10, 1978) was an influential New York City talk radio show host.From the mid 1950s until his death in 1978, Nebel was a hugely popular all night radio host, with millions of regular listeners and what… …   Wikipedia

  • Master franchise — A master franchise is a person or entity who provides services to franchisees in a specified territory, typically a major market, geographical region or even one or more countries.[1] Master franchising is a method that has been employed by most… …   Wikipedia

  • Long Branch, New Jersey — Infobox Settlement official name = Long Branch, New Jersey settlement type = City nickname = motto = imagesize = image caption = image imagesize = image caption = image mapsize = 250x200px map caption = Map of Long Branch in Monmouth County.… …   Wikipedia

  • Master Tara Singh — Malhotra (24 June, 1885, Rawalpindi, Punjab 22 November, 1967, Chandigarh) was a prominent Sikh political and religious leader in the first half of the 20th century. He was instrumental in organizing the Shiromani Gurdwara Prabhandak Committee,… …   Wikipedia

  • Master Peter's Puppet Show — ( El retablo de Maese Pedro ) is a puppet opera in one act with a prologue and epilogue, composed by Manuel de Falla to a Spanish libretto based on an episode from Don Quixote by Miguel de Cervantes. The libretto is a faithful adaptation of the… …   Wikipedia

  • Long (Bloody Roar) — Long (ロン) is a fictional character from the Bloody Roar series. He is one of a few characters to have appeared in every game of the series.Affiliation*Shenlong His Clone/Friendly Rival *Uriko Former Student *Alice Friend *Fox May Have Worked With …   Wikipedia

  • Master P — Background information Birth name Percy Robert Miller Also known as P. Miller …   Wikipedia

  • Master of the Five Magics —   Author(s) Lyndon Hardy …   Wikipedia

  • Master C'baoth — is a fictional character in the Star Wars Expanded Universe. The original, Jorus C baoth (pronounced Jaw russ Ka bowth ), was a Jedi Master in the Old Republic era. The second, Joruus C baoth, was an insane clone of the original C baoth who… …   Wikipedia

  • Master Keaton — MASTERキートン (Masutā Kīton) Genre Detective fiction, Adventure, Drama …   Wikipedia

  • Master of Puppets (song) — Master of Puppets Single by Metallica from the album Master of Puppets Released July 2, 1986 …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»